Many hyperlinks are disabled.
Use anonymous login
to enable hyperlinks.
Changes In Branch bug6e8afe516d-87
Excluding Merge-Ins
This is equivalent to a diff from
8ad2b2d0
to b8fa3732
2019-08-28
| | |
19:34 |
|
check-in: f3ae247a user: fvogel tags: trunk
|
2019-08-13
| | |
10:24 |
|
Closed-Leaf
check-in: b8fa3732 user: jan.nijtmans tags: bug6e8afe516d-87, tip-532
|
10:09 |
|
check-in: 77c59955 user: jan.nijtmans tags: bug6e8afe516d, tip-532
|
09:37 |
|
check-in: 176c7b16 user: jan.nijtmans tags: bug6e8afe516d-87, tip-532
|
2019-03-29
| | |
19:40 |
|
check-in: fd419d47 user: jan.nijtmans tags: bug6e8afe516d, tip-532
|
2019-02-03
| | |
20:32 |
|
check-in: fba343f0 user: fvogel tags: bug6e8afe516d-87, tip-532
|
20:31 |
|
check-in: 8ad2b2d0 user: fvogel tags: bug6e8afe516d, tip-532
|
20:22 |
|
check-in: a2d9055c user: fvogel tags: bug6e8afe516d, tip-532
|
| | |
Changes to .fossil-settings/encoding-glob.
1
2
3
4
5
|
1
2
3
|
-
-
|
win/buildall.vc.bat
win/makefile.vc
win/mkd.bat
win/rmd.bat
win/rules.vc
|
Changes to .project.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
|
-
+
|
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<projectDescription>
<name>tk8.6</name>
<name>tk8.7</name>
<comment></comment>
<projects>
</projects>
<buildSpec>
</buildSpec>
<natures>
</natures>
|
︙ | | |
Changes to ChangeLog.2002.
︙ | | |
2234
2235
2236
2237
2238
2239
2240
2241
2242
2243
2244
2245
2246
2247
2248
|
2234
2235
2236
2237
2238
2239
2240
2241
2242
2243
2244
2245
2246
2247
2248
|
-
+
|
Removed setting inputContext to null in Tk_MakeWindowExist as it
was redundant.
* unix/tkUnixWm.c (CreateWrapper): Removed redundat setting of
inputContext to null.
* win/Makefile.in: changed gdb and shell targets to properly build
all binaries before running (otherwise an error often occured).
all binaries before running (otherwise an error often occurred).
2002-03-28 David Gravereaux <[email protected]>
* win/.cvsignore (new):
* win/lamp.bmp (new):
* win/makefile.vc:
* win/nmakehlp.c (new):
|
︙ | | |
Changes to ChangeLog.2004.
︙ | | |
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
|
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
|
-
+
|
* doc/canvas.n: Add paragraph to make clearer what is going on with the
default canvas origin. [Bug 956681]
2004-07-05 George Peter Staplin <[email protected]>
* generic/tkEvent.c: TK_XIM_SPOT preprocessor usage was modified
slightly to fix a bug that occured when TK_XIM_SPOT was defined as 0.
slightly to fix a bug that occurred when TK_XIM_SPOT was defined as 0.
Thanks to Joe Mistachkin for reporting this bug.
2004-07-05 Donal K. Fellows <[email protected]>
TIP#158 IMPLEMENTATION
* tests/bind.test: Allow Win apps to distinguish keys
|
︙ | | |
Deleted README.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
|
|
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
|
README: Tk
This is the Tk 8.6.9 source distribution.
http://sourceforge.net/projects/tcl/files/Tcl/
You can get any source release of Tk from the URL above.
1. Introduction
---------------
This directory contains the sources and documentation for Tk, an X11
toolkit implemented with the Tcl scripting language.
For details on features, incompatibilities, and potential problems with
this release, see the Tcl/Tk 8.6 Web page at
http://www.tcl-lang.org/software/tcltk/8.6.html
or refer to the "changes" file in this directory, which contains a
historical record of all changes to Tk.
Tk is maintained, enhanced, and distributed freely by the Tcl community.
Source code development and tracking of bug reports and feature requests
takes place at:
http://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/
with the Tcl Developer Xchange at:
http://www.tcl-lang.org/
Tk is a freely available open source package. You can do virtually
anything you like with it, such as modifying it, redistributing it,
and selling it either in whole or in part. See the file
"license.terms" for complete information.
2. See Tcl README
-----------------
Please see the README file that comes with the associated Tcl release
for more information. There are pointers there to extensive
documentation. In addition, there are additional README files
in the subdirectories of this distribution.
|
Added README.md.
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
|
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
# README: Tk
This is the **Tk 8.7a2** source distribution.
You can get any source release of Tk from [our distribution
site](https://sourceforge.net/projects/tcl/files/Tcl/).
## <a id="intro">1.</a> Introduction
This directory contains the sources and documentation for Tk, a
cross-platform GUI toolkit implemented with the Tcl scripting language.
For details on features, incompatibilities, and potential problems with
this release, see [the Tcl/Tk 8.7 Web page](https://www.tcl.tk/software/tcltk/8.7.html)
or refer to the "changes" file in this directory, which contains a
historical record of all changes to Tk.
Tk is maintained, enhanced, and distributed freely by the Tcl community.
Source code development and tracking of bug reports and feature requests
takes place at [core.tcl-lang.org](https://core.tcl-lang.org/).
Tcl/Tk release and mailing list services are [hosted by
SourceForge](https://sourceforge.net/projects/tcl/)
with the Tcl Developer Xchange hosted at
[www.tcl-lang.org](https://www.tcl-lang.org).
Tk is a freely available open source package. You can do virtually
anything you like with it, such as modifying it, redistributing it,
and selling it either in whole or in part. See the file
`license.terms` for complete information.
## <a id="tcl">2.</a> See Tcl README.md
Please see the README.md file that comes with the associated Tcl release
for more information. There are pointers there to extensive
documentation. In addition, there are additional README files
in the subdirectories of this distribution.
|
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
Changes to changes.
︙ | | |
5095
5096
5097
5098
5099
5100
5101
5102
5103
5104
5105
5106
5107
5108
5109
|
5095
5096
5097
5098
5099
5100
5101
5102
5103
5104
5105
5106
5107
5108
5109
|
-
+
|
correctly. (hobbs)
2001-08-28 (bug fix) fixed tk_chooseDirectory crash on Win95. (baker)
2001-08-28 (bug fix) removed 2 second 'raise' delay seen by some Unix
window managers. (hobbs, baker)
2001-09-14 (bug fix) fixed memory leaks that occured if errors were
2001-09-14 (bug fix) fixed memory leaks that occurred if errors were
thrown while initializing the channel for an image. (darley)
2001-09-20 (new feature) --enable-64bit support was added for HP 11 when
using the native compiler.
2001-10-03 (new feature) finalized Win64 support with latest RC1 release
and SDK. (hobbs, stacy)
|
︙ | | |
7565
7566
7567
7568
7569
7570
7571
|
7565
7566
7567
7568
7569
7570
7571
7572
7573
7574
7575
7576
7577
7578
7579
7580
7581
7582
7583
7584
7585
7586
7587
7588
7589
7590
7591
7592
7593
7594
|
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
2018-10-17 (bug)[4b555a] hang in [$text search -all] (vogel,danckaert)
2018-10-30 (new platform) port to system changes in Mac OSX 10.14 (culler)
2018-11-04 (bug)[6b22d4] [treeview] binding fix (ohagan)
- Released 8.6.9, November 16, 2018 - http://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/ for details -
Changes to 8.7a1 include all changes to the 8.6 line through 8.6.7,
plus the following, which focuses on the high-level feature changes
in this changeset (new minor version) rather than bug fixes:
2016-03-07 (feature)[841280] spinbox autoswap -to/-from to get ordering (vogel)
2016-03-27 (feature)[38dc27] Support <Button-6> & <Button-7> (nijtmans)
2016-08-29 (TIP 449) [text] undo/redo return character range (vogel)
2016-11-02 (feature) Removed undocumented command [tk_getFileType] (vogel)
*** POTENTIAL INCOMPATIBILITY ***
2017-02-05 (bug)[c0dbdd] Compatibility fonts shadowed system fonts (vogel)
2017-03-21 (TIP 442) display text in a progressbar (zaumseil)
2017-04-13 \u escaped content in msg files converted to true utf-8 (nijtmans)
2017-08-28 (TIP 166) Extended color notation for alpha channel (bachmann)
--- Released 8.7a1, September 8, 2017 --- http://core.tcl.tk/tk/ for details
|
Deleted compat/stdlib.h.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
|
|
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
|
/*
* stdlib.h --
*
* Declares facilities exported by the "stdlib" portion of the C library.
* This file isn't complete in the ANSI-C sense; it only declares things
* that are needed by Tk. This file is needed even on many systems with
* their own stdlib.h (e.g. SunOS) because not all stdlib.h files declare
* all the procedures needed here (such as strtod).
*
* Copyright (c) 1991 The Regents of the University of California.
* Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
*
* See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
* this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
*/
#ifndef _STDLIB
#define _STDLIB
#ifndef _TCL
# include <tcl.h>
#endif
extern void abort(void);
extern double atof(const char *string);
extern int atoi(const char *string);
extern long atol(const char *string);
extern char * calloc(unsigned int numElements, unsigned int size);
extern void exit(int status);
extern int free(char *blockPtr);
extern char * getenv(const char *name);
extern char * malloc(unsigned int numBytes);
extern void qsort(void *base, int n, int size, int (*compar)(
const void *element1, const void *element2));
extern char * realloc(char *ptr, unsigned int numBytes);
extern double strtod(const char *string, char **endPtr);
extern long strtol(const char *string, char **endPtr, int base);
extern unsigned long strtoul(const char *string, char **endPtr, int base);
#endif /* _STDLIB */
|
Deleted compat/unistd.h.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
|
|
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
|
/*
* unistd.h --
*
* Macros, constants and prototypes for Posix conformance.
*
* Copyright 1989 Regents of the University of California Permission to use,
* copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any
* purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
* copyright notice appear in all copies. The University of California makes
* no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose.
* It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
*/
#ifndef _UNISTD
#define _UNISTD
#include <sys/types.h>
#ifndef _TCL
# include <tcl.h>
#endif
#ifndef NULL
#define NULL 0
#endif
/*
* Strict POSIX stuff goes here. Extensions go down below, in the ifndef
* _POSIX_SOURCE section.
*/
extern void _exit(int status);
extern int access(const char *path, int mode);
extern int chdir(const char *path);
extern int chown(const char *path, uid_t owner, gid_t group);
extern int close(int fd);
extern int dup(int oldfd);
extern int dup2(int oldfd, int newfd);
extern int execl(const char *path, ...);
extern int execle(const char *path, ...);
extern int execlp(const char *file, ...);
extern int execv(const char *path, char **argv);
extern int execve(const char *path, char **argv, char **envp);
extern int execvp(const char *file, char **argv);
extern pid_t fork(void);
extern char * getcwd(char *buf, size_t size);
extern gid_t getegid(void);
extern uid_t geteuid(void);
extern gid_t getgid(void);
extern int getgroups(int bufSize, int *buffer);
extern pid_t getpid(void);
extern uid_t getuid(void);
extern int isatty(int fd);
extern long lseek(int fd, long offset, int whence);
extern int pipe(int *fildes);
extern int read(int fd, char *buf, size_t size);
extern int setgid(gid_t group);
extern int setuid(uid_t user);
extern unsigned sleep(unsigned seconds);
extern char * ttyname(int fd);
extern int unlink(const char *path);
extern int write(int fd, const char *buf, size_t size);
#ifndef _POSIX_SOURCE
extern char * crypt(const char *, const char *);
extern int fchown(int fd, uid_t owner, gid_t group);
extern int flock(int fd, int operation);
extern int ftruncate(int fd, unsigned long length);
extern int ioctl(int fd, int request, ...);
extern int readlink(const char *path, char *buf, int bufsize);
extern int setegid(gid_t group);
extern int seteuid(uid_t user);
extern int setreuid(int ruid, int euid);
extern int symlink(const char *, const char *);
extern int ttyslot(void);
extern int truncate(const char *path, unsigned long length);
extern int vfork(void);
#endif /* _POSIX_SOURCE */
#endif /* _UNISTD */
|
Changes to doc/3DBorder.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj, Tk_Get3DBorder, Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj, Tk_Draw3DRectangle, Tk_Fill3DRectangle, Tk_Draw3DPolygon, Tk_Fill3DPolygon, Tk_3DVerticalBevel, Tk_3DHorizontalBevel, Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder, Tk_NameOf3DBorder, Tk_3DBorderColor, Tk_3DBorderGC, Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj, Tk_Free3DBorder \- draw borders with three-dimensional appearance
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/BindTable.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_CreateBindingTable 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_CreateBindingTable, Tk_DeleteBindingTable, Tk_CreateBinding, Tk_DeleteBinding, Tk_GetBinding, Tk_GetAllBindings, Tk_DeleteAllBindings, Tk_BindEvent \- invoke scripts in response to X events
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/CanvPsY.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_CanvasPs 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_CanvasPsY, Tk_CanvasPsBitmap, Tk_CanvasPsColor, Tk_CanvasPsFont, Tk_CanvasPsPath, Tk_CanvasPsStipple \- utility procedures for generating Postscript for canvases
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/CanvTkwin.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_CanvasTkwin 3 4.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_CanvasTkwin, Tk_CanvasGetCoord, Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords, Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin, Tk_CanvasWindowCoords, Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw, Tk_CanvasTagsOption \- utility procedures for canvas type managers
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/CanvTxtInfo.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_CanvasTextInfo 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_CanvasTextInfo \- additional information for managing text items in canvases
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/Clipboard.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_ClipboardClear 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_ClipboardClear, Tk_ClipboardAppend \- Manage the clipboard
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/ClrSelect.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_ClearSelection 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_ClearSelection \- Deselect a selection
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/ConfigWidg.3.
︙ | | |
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
|
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
|
-
+
|
.CS
typedef struct {
int \fItype\fR;
const char *\fIargvName\fR;
const char *\fIdbName\fR;
const char *\fIdbClass\fR;
const char *\fIdefValue\fR;
int \fIoffset\fR;
size_t \fIoffset\fR;
int \fIspecFlags\fR;
const Tk_CustomOption *\fIcustomPtr\fR;
} \fBTk_ConfigSpec\fR;
.CE
The \fItype\fR field indicates what type of configuration option this is
(e.g. \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR\fR for a color value, or \fBTK_CONFIG_INT\fR for
an integer value). The \fItype\fR field indicates how to use the
|
︙ | | |
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
|
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
|
-
+
-
-
+
|
form, such as a color if \fItype\fR is \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR\fR or an integer
if \fItype\fR is \fBTK_CONFIG_INT\fR. This value is then stored in the
record pointed to by \fIwidgRec\fR. This record is assumed to
contain information relevant to the manager of the widget; its exact
type is unknown to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR. The \fIoffset\fR field
of each \fIspecs\fR entry indicates where in \fIwidgRec\fR to store
the information about this configuration option. You should use the
\fBTk_Offset\fR macro to generate \fIoffset\fR values (see below for
\fBoffsetof\fR macro to generate \fIoffset\fR values. The location
a description of \fBTk_Offset\fR). The location indicated by
\fIwidgRec\fR and \fIoffset\fR will be referred to as the
indicated by \fIwidgRec\fR and \fIoffset\fR will be referred to as the
.QW target
in the descriptions below.
.PP
The \fItype\fR field of each entry in \fIspecs\fR determines what
to do with the string value of that configuration option. The
legal values for \fItype\fR, and the corresponding actions, are:
.TP
|
︙ | | |
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
|
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
|
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
|
for N different widget types, then N of the high-order bits will
be used. Each \fIspecs\fR entry will have one of more of those
bits set in its \fIspecFlags\fR field to indicate the widget types
for which this entry is valid. When calling \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR,
\fIflags\fR will have a single one of these bits set to select the
entries for the desired widget type. For a working example of
this feature, see the code in tkButton.c.
.SH TK_OFFSET
.PP
The \fBTk_Offset\fR macro is provided as a safe way of generating
the \fIoffset\fR values for entries in Tk_ConfigSpec structures.
It takes two arguments: the name of a type of record, and the
name of a field in that record. It returns the byte offset of
the named field in records of the given type.
.SH TK_CONFIGUREINFO
.PP
The \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR procedure may be used to obtain
information about one or all of the options for a given widget.
Given a token for a window (\fItkwin\fR), a table describing the
configuration options for a class of widgets (\fIspecs\fR), a
pointer to a widget record containing the current information for
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/ConfigWind.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_ConfigureWindow 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_ConfigureWindow, Tk_MoveWindow, Tk_ResizeWindow, Tk_MoveResizeWindow, Tk_SetWindowBorderWidth, Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes, Tk_SetWindowBackground, Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap, Tk_SetWindowBorder, Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap, Tk_SetWindowColormap, Tk_DefineCursor, Tk_UndefineCursor \- change window configuration or attributes
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/CoordToWin.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_CoordsToWindow 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_CoordsToWindow \- Find window containing a point
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/CrtCmHdlr.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler 3 "8.4" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler, Tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler \- associate procedure callback with ClientMessage type X events
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
|
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
|
-
+
|
\fBWM_PROTOCOL\fR. \fBTk_CreateClientMessageHandler\fR is intended for use
by applications which need to watch X ClientMessage events, such as drag and
drop applications.
.PP
The callback to \fIproc\fR will be made by \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR;
this mechanism only works in programs that dispatch events
through \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR (or through other Tk procedures that
call \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR, such as \fBTk_DoOneEvent\fR or
call \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR, such as \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR or
\fBTk_MainLoop\fR).
.PP
\fIProc\fR should have arguments and result that match the
type \fBTk_ClientMessageProc\fR:
.CS
typedef int \fBTk_ClientMessageProc\fR(
Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR,
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/CrtConsoleChan.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2007 ActiveState Software Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_InitConsoleChannels 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_InitConsoleChannels \- Install the console channels as standard channels
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/CrtErrHdlr.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_CreateErrorHandler 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_CreateErrorHandler, Tk_DeleteErrorHandler \- handle X protocol errors
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/CrtGenHdlr.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_CreateGenericHandler 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_CreateGenericHandler, Tk_DeleteGenericHandler \- associate procedure callback with all X events
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
|
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
|
-
+
|
as tracing X events, monitoring events on windows not owned by Tk,
accessing X-related libraries that were not originally designed for
use with Tk, and so on.
.PP
The callback to \fIproc\fR will be made by \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR;
this mechanism only works in programs that dispatch events
through \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR (or through other Tk procedures that
call \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR, such as \fBTk_DoOneEvent\fR or
call \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR, such as \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR or
\fBTk_MainLoop\fR).
.PP
\fIProc\fR should have arguments and result that match the
type \fBTk_GenericProc\fR:
.CS
typedef int \fBTk_GenericProc\fR(
ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/CrtImgType.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_CreateImageType 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_CreateImageType, Tk_GetImageMasterData, Tk_InitImageArgs \- define new kind of image
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/CrtItemType.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_CreateItemType 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_CreateItemType, Tk_GetItemTypes \- define new kind of canvas item
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
|
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
|
-
+
+
+
+
|
The first data structure is a Tk_ItemType; it contains
information such as the name of the type and pointers to
the standard procedures implemented by the type manager:
.PP
.CS
typedef struct Tk_ItemType {
const char *\fIname\fR;
int \fIitemSize\fR;
size_t \fIitemSize\fR;
Tk_ItemCreateProc *\fIcreateProc\fR;
const Tk_ConfigSpec *\fIconfigSpecs\fR;
Tk_ItemConfigureProc *\fIconfigProc\fR;
Tk_ItemCoordProc *\fIcoordProc\fR;
Tk_ItemDeleteProc *\fIdeleteProc\fR;
Tk_ItemDisplayProc *\fIdisplayProc\fR;
int \fIalwaysRedraw\fR;
Tk_ItemPointProc *\fIpointProc\fR;
Tk_ItemAreaProc *\fIareaProc\fR;
Tk_ItemPostscriptProc *\fIpostscriptProc\fR;
Tk_ItemScaleProc *\fIscaleProc\fR;
Tk_ItemTranslateProc *\fItranslateProc\fR;
Tk_ItemIndexProc *\fIindexProc\fR;
Tk_ItemCursorProc *\fIicursorProc\fR;
Tk_ItemSelectionProc *\fIselectionProc\fR;
Tk_ItemInsertProc *\fIinsertProc\fR;
Tk_ItemDCharsProc *\fIdCharsProc\fR;
Tk_ItemType *\fInextPtr\fR;
.VS "8.7, TIP164"
Tk_ItemRotateProc *\fIrotateProc\fR;
.VE "8.7, TIP164"
} \fBTk_ItemType\fR;
.CE
.PP
The fields of a Tk_ItemType structure are described in more detail
later in this manual entry.
When \fBTk_CreateItemType\fR is called, its \fItypePtr\fR
argument must point to a structure with all of the fields initialized
|
︙ | | |
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
|
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
|
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
.CE
.PP
The \fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR arguments have the usual meaning,
and \fIdeltaX\fR and \fIdeltaY\fR give the amounts that should be
added to each x and y coordinate within the item.
The type manager should adjust the item's coordinates and
update the bounding box in the item's header.
.SS ROTATEPROC
.VS "8.7, TIP164"
.PP
\fItypePtr\->rotateProc\fR is invoked by Tk to rotate a canvas item
during the \fBrotate\fR widget command.
The procedure must match the following prototype:
.PP
.CS
typedef void \fBTk_ItemRotateProc\fR(
Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR,
Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR,
double \fIoriginX\fR,
double \fIoriginY\fR,
double \fIangleRad\fR);
.CE
.PP
The \fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR arguments have the usual meaning.
\fIoriginX\fR and \fIoriginY\fR specify an origin relative to which
the item is to be rotated, and \fIangleRad\fR gives the anticlockwise
rotation to be applied in radians.
The item should adjust the coordinates of its control points so that where
they used to have coordinates \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR, they will have new
coordinates \fIx\(fm\fR and \fIy\(fm\fR, where
.PP
.CS
\fIrelX\fR = \fIx\fR - \fIoriginX\fR
\fIrelY\fR = \fIy\fR - \fIoriginY\fR
\fIx\(fm\fR = \fIoriginX\fR + \fIrelX\fR \(mu cos(\fIangleRad\fR) + \fIrelY\fR \(mu sin(\fIangleRad\fR)
\fIy\(fm\fR = \fIoriginY\fR \(mi \fIrelX\fR \(mu sin(\fIangleRad\fR) + \fIrelY\fR \(mu cos(\fIangleRad\fR)
.CE
.PP
The control points for an item are not necessarily the coordinates provided to
the item when it is created (or via the \fItypePtr\->coordProc\fR), but could
instead be derived from them.
\fIrotateProc\fR must also update the bounding box in the item's header.
.PP
Item types do not need to provide a \fItypePtr\->rotateProc\fR. If the
\fItypePtr\->rotateProc\fR is NULL, the \fItypePtr\->coordProc\fR will be
used instead to retrieve and update the list of coordinates.
.VE "8.7, TIP164"
.SS INDEXPROC
.PP
\fItypePtr\->indexProc\fR is invoked by Tk to translate a string
index specification into a numerical index, for example during the
\fBindex\fR widget command.
It is only relevant for item types that support indexable text or coordinates;
\fItypePtr\->indexProc\fR may be specified as NULL for non-textual
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/CrtPhImgFmt.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Australian National University
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
'\" Author: Paul Mackerras ([email protected]),
'\" Department of Computer Science,
'\" Australian National University.
'\"
.TH Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/DeleteImg.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_DeleteImage 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_DeleteImage \- Destroy an image.
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/DrawFocHlt.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_DrawFocusHighlight 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_DrawFocusHighlight \- draw the traversal highlight ring for a widget
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/EventHndlr.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_CreateEventHandler 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_CreateEventHandler, Tk_DeleteEventHandler \- associate procedure callback with an X event
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
|
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
|
-
+
|
.PP
\fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR arranges for \fIproc\fR to be
invoked in the future whenever one of the event types specified
by \fImask\fR occurs in the window specified by \fItkwin\fR.
The callback to \fIproc\fR will be made by \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR;
this mechanism only works in programs that dispatch events
through \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR (or through other Tk procedures that
call \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR, such as \fBTk_DoOneEvent\fR or
call \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR, such as \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR or
\fBTk_MainLoop\fR).
.PP
\fIProc\fR should have arguments and result that match the
type \fBTk_EventProc\fR:
.CS
typedef void \fBTk_EventProc\fR(
ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/FreeXId.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
|
-
+
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_FreeXId 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_FreeXId \- make X resource identifier available for reuse
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_FreeXId(\fIdisplay, id\fB)\fR
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Display *display out
.AP Display *display in
Display for which \fIid\fR was allocated.
.AP XID id in
Identifier of X resource (window, font, pixmap, cursor, graphics
context, or colormap) that is no longer in use.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The default allocator for resource identifiers provided by Xlib is very
This function is deprecated, it doesn't do anything since 2008-08-19.
simple-minded and does not allow resource identifiers to be re-used.
If a long-running application reaches the end of the resource id
space, it will generate an X protocol error and crash.
Tk replaces the default id allocator with its own allocator, which
allows identifiers to be reused.
In order for this to work, \fBTk_FreeXId\fR must be called to
tell the allocator about resources that have been freed.
Tk automatically calls \fBTk_FreeXId\fR whenever it frees a
resource, so if you use procedures like \fBTk_GetFont\fR,
\fBTk_GetGC\fR, and \fBTk_GetPixmap\fR then you need not call
\fBTk_FreeXId\fR.
However, if you allocate resources directly from Xlib, for example
by calling \fBXCreatePixmap\fR, then you should call \fBTk_FreeXId\fR
when you call the corresponding Xlib free procedure, such as
\fBXFreePixmap\fR.
If you do not call \fBTk_FreeXId\fR then the resource identifier will
be lost, which could cause problems if the application runs long enough
to lose all of the available identifiers.
.SH KEYWORDS
resource identifier
|
Changes to doc/GeomReq.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_GeometryRequest 3 "8.4" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GeometryRequest, Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize, Tk_SetInternalBorder, Tk_SetInternalBorderEx \- specify desired geometry or internal border for a window
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/GetAnchor.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_GetAnchorFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GetAnchorFromObj, Tk_GetAnchor, Tk_NameOfAnchor \- translate between strings and anchor positions
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/GetBitmap.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj, Tk_GetBitmap, Tk_GetBitmapFromObj, Tk_DefineBitmap, Tk_NameOfBitmap, Tk_SizeOfBitmap, Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj, Tk_FreeBitmap \- maintain database of single-plane pixmaps
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/GetCapStyl.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_GetCapStyle 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GetCapStyle, Tk_NameOfCapStyle \- translate between strings and cap styles
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/GetClrmap.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_GetColormap 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GetColormap, Tk_PreserveColormap, Tk_FreeColormap \- allocate and free colormaps
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/GetDash.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1989-1993 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_GetDash 3 8.3 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GetDash \- convert from string to valid dash structure.
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/GetGC.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_GetGC 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GetGC, Tk_FreeGC \- maintain database of read-only graphics contexts
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/GetHINSTANCE.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
'\" All rights reserved.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_GetHISTANCE 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GetHINSTANCE \- retrieve the global application instance handle
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/GetHWND.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
'\" All rights reserved.
'\"
'\"
.TH HWND 3 8.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GetHWND, Tk_AttachHWND \- manage interactions between the Windows handle and an X window
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/GetImage.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_GetImage 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GetImage, Tk_RedrawImage, Tk_SizeOfImage, Tk_FreeImage \- use an image in a widget
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/GetJoinStl.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_GetJoinStyle 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GetJoinStyle, Tk_NameOfJoinStyle \- translate between strings and join styles
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/GetJustify.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_GetJustifyFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GetJustifyFromObj, Tk_GetJustify, Tk_NameOfJustify \- translate between strings and justification styles
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/GetOption.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_GetOption 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GetOption \- retrieve an option from the option database
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/GetPixels.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_GetPixelsFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GetPixelsFromObj, Tk_GetPixels, Tk_GetMMFromObj, Tk_GetScreenMM \- translate between strings and screen units
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/GetPixmap.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_GetPixmap 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GetPixmap, Tk_FreePixmap \- allocate and free pixmaps
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/GetRelief.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_GetReliefFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GetReliefFromObj, Tk_GetRelief, Tk_NameOfRelief \- translate between strings and relief values
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/GetRootCrd.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_GetRootCoords 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GetRootCoords \- Compute root-window coordinates of window
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/GetScroll.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
|
-
+
-
+
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_GetScrollInfo 3 8.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GetScrollInfoObj, Tk_GetScrollInfo \- parse arguments for scrolling commands
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetScrollInfoObj(\fIinterp, objc, objv, dblPtr, intPtr\fB)\fR
\fBTk_GetScrollInfoObj(\fIinterp, objc, objv, fractionPtr, stepsPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetScrollInfo(\fIinterp, argc, argv, dblPtr, intPtr\fB)\fR
\fBTk_GetScrollInfo(\fIinterp, argc, argv, fractionPtr, stepsPtr\fB)\fR
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tcl_Interp" *fractionPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP int objc in
Number of Tcl_Obj's in \fIobjv\fR array.
.AP "Tcl_Obj *const" objv[] in
|
︙ | | |
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
|
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
|
-
-
+
+
-
+
-
-
+
+
|
\fBTk_GetScrollInfoObj\fR parses the arguments expected by widget
scrolling commands such as \fBxview\fR and \fByview\fR.
It receives the entire list of words that make up a widget command
and parses the words starting with \fIobjv\fR[2].
The words starting with \fIobjv\fR[2] must have one of the following forms:
.CS
\fBmoveto \fIfraction\fR
\fBscroll \fInumber\fB units\fR
\fBscroll \fInumber\fB pages\fR
\fBscroll \fInumber\fB pages\fR
\fBscroll \fInumber\fB units\fR
.CE
.LP
Any of the \fBmoveto\fR, \fBscroll\fR, \fBunits\fR, and \fBpages\fR
Any of the \fBmoveto\fR, \fBscroll\fR, \fBpages\fR, and \fBunits\fR
keywords may be abbreviated.
If \fIobjv\fR has the \fBmoveto\fR form, \fBTK_SCROLL_MOVETO\fR
is returned as result and \fI*fractionPtr\fR is filled in with the
\fIfraction\fR argument to the command, which must be a proper real
value.
If \fIobjv\fR has the \fBscroll\fR form, \fBTK_SCROLL_UNITS\fR
or \fBTK_SCROLL_PAGES\fR is returned and \fI*stepsPtr\fR is filled
If \fIobjv\fR has the \fBscroll\fR form, \fBTK_SCROLL_PAGES\fR
or \fBTK_SCROLL_UNITS\fR is returned and \fI*stepsPtr\fR is filled
in with the \fInumber\fR value, which must be a proper integer.
If an error occurs in parsing the arguments, \fBTK_SCROLL_ERROR\fR
is returned and an error message is left in interpreter
\fIinterp\fR's result.
.PP
\fBTk_GetScrollInfo\fR is identical in function to
\fBTk_GetScrollInfoObj\fR. However, \fBTk_GetScrollInfo\fR accepts
string arguments, making it more appropriate for use with legacy
widgets.
.SH KEYWORDS
parse, scrollbar, scrolling command, xview, yview
|
Changes to doc/GetSelect.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_GetSelection 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GetSelection \- retrieve the contents of a selection
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/GetUid.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_GetUid 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GetUid, Tk_Uid \- convert from string to unique identifier
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/GetVRoot.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_GetVRootGeometry 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GetVRootGeometry \- Get location and size of virtual root for window
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/GetVisual.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_GetVisual 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GetVisual \- translate from string to visual
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/Grab.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
'\" All rights reserved.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_Grab 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_Grab, Tk_Ungrab \- manipulate grab state in an application
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/HWNDToWindow.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
'\" All rights reserved.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_HWNDToWindow 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_HWNDToWindow \- Find Tk's window information for a Windows window
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/HandleEvent.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
|
-
+
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1992 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_HandleEvent 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_HandleEvent \- invoke event handlers for window system events
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_HandleEvent\fR(\fIeventPtr\fR)
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS XEvent *eventPtr
.AP XEvent *eventPtr in
Pointer to X event to dispatch to relevant handler(s). It is important
that all unused fields of the structure be set to zero.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
\fBTk_HandleEvent\fR is a lower-level procedure that deals with window
events. It is called by \fBTcl_ServiceEvent\fR (and indirectly by
\fBTk_DoOneEvent\fR), and in a few other cases within Tk.
\fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR), and in a few other cases within Tk.
It makes callbacks to any window event
handlers (created by calls to \fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR)
that match \fIeventPtr\fR and then returns. In some cases
it may be useful for an application to bypass the Tk event
queue and call \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR directly instead of
calling \fBTcl_QueueEvent\fR followed by
\fBTcl_ServiceEvent\fR.
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/IdToWindow.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_IdToWindow 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_IdToWindow \- Find Tk's window information for an X window
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/ImgChanged.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_ImageChanged 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_ImageChanged \- notify widgets that image needs to be redrawn
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/Inactive.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
'\" All rights reserved.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_GetUserInactiveTime 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GetUserInactiveTime, Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime \- discover user inactivity time
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/InternAtom.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_InternAtom 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_InternAtom, Tk_GetAtomName \- manage cache of X atoms
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/MainLoop.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1992 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_MainLoop 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_MainLoop \- loop for events until all windows are deleted
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/MainWin.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_MainWindow 3 7.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_MainWindow, Tk_GetNumMainWindows \- functions for querying main window information
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/MaintGeom.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_MaintainGeometry 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_MaintainGeometry, Tk_UnmaintainGeometry \- maintain geometry of one window relative to another
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/ManageGeom.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_ManageGeometry 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_ManageGeometry \- arrange to handle geometry requests for a window
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/MoveToplev.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_MoveToplevelWindow 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_MoveToplevelWindow \- Adjust the position of a top-level window
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
|
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
|
-
+
|
similar in function to the \fBwm geometry\fR Tcl command except that
negative offsets cannot be specified. It is invoked by widgets such as
menus that want to appear at a particular place on the screen.
.PP
When \fBTk_MoveToplevelWindow\fR is called it does not immediately
pass on the new desired location to the window manager; it defers
this action until all other outstanding work has been completed,
using the \fBTk_DoWhenIdle\fR mechanism.
using the \fBTcl_DoWhenIdle\fR mechanism.
.SH KEYWORDS
position, top-level window, window manager
|
Changes to doc/Name.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_Name 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_Name, Tk_PathName, Tk_NameToWindow \- convert between names and window tokens
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/NameOfImg.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
|
-
+
-
+
-
-
+
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_NameOfImage 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_NameOfImage \- Return name of image.
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_NameOfImage\fR(\fItypePtr\fR)
\fBTk_NameOfImage\fR(\fIimageMaster\fR)
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_ImageMaster *masterPtr
.AP Tk_ImageMaster *masterPtr in
.AS Tk_ImageMaster imageMaster
.AP Tk_ImageMaster imageMaster in
Token for image, which was passed to image manager's \fIcreateProc\fR when
the image was created.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
This procedure is invoked by image managers to find out the name
of an image. Given the token for the image, it returns the
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/OwnSelect.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_OwnSelection 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_OwnSelection \- make a window the owner of the primary selection
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/ParseArgv.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1992 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_ParseArgv 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_ParseArgv \- process command-line options
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
|
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
|
-
-
+
+
|
.PP
The \fIargTable\fR array specifies the kinds of arguments that are
expected; each of its entries has the following structure:
.CS
typedef struct {
const char *\fIkey\fR;
int \fItype\fR;
char *\fIsrc\fR;
char *\fIdst\fR;
void *\fIsrc\fR;
void *\fIdst\fR;
const char *\fIhelp\fR;
} \fBTk_ArgvInfo\fR;
.CE
The \fIkey\fR field is a string such as
.QW \-display
or
.QW \-bg
|
︙ | | |
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
|
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
|
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
|
char *fileName = defaultFileName;
Boolean exec = FALSE;
/*
* Define option descriptions.
*/
Tk_ArgvInfo argTable[] = {
{"\-X", TK_ARGV_CONSTANT, (char *) 1, (char *) &debugFlag,
{"\-X", TK_ARGV_CONSTANT, (char *) 1, &debugFlag,
"Turn on debugging printfs"},
{"\-N", TK_ARGV_INT, NULL, (char *) &numReps,
{"\-N", TK_ARGV_INT, NULL, &numReps,
"Number of repetitions"},
{"\-of", TK_ARGV_STRING, NULL, (char *) &fileName,
{"\-of", TK_ARGV_STRING, NULL, &fileName,
"Name of file for output"},
{"x", TK_ARGV_REST, NULL, (char *) &exec,
{"x", TK_ARGV_REST, NULL, &exec,
"File to exec, followed by any arguments (must be last argument)."},
{NULL, TK_ARGV_END, NULL, NULL,
NULL}
};
main(argc, argv)
int argc;
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/QWinEvent.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_QueueWindowEvent 3 7.5 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_CollapseMotionEvents, Tk_QueueWindowEvent \- Add a window event to the Tcl event queue
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/Restack.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_RestackWindow 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_RestackWindow \- Change a window's position in the stacking order
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/RestrictEv.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_RestrictEvents 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_RestrictEvents \- filter and selectively delay X events
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
|
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
|
-
+
-
+
|
.AP ClientData *prevArgPtr out
Pointer to place to save argument to previous restrict procedure.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
This procedure is useful in certain situations where applications
are only prepared to receive certain X events. After
\fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR is called, \fBTk_DoOneEvent\fR (and
\fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR is called, \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR (and
hence \fBTk_MainLoop\fR) will filter X input events through
\fIproc\fR. \fIProc\fR indicates whether a
given event is to be processed immediately, deferred until some
later time (e.g. when the event restriction is lifted), or discarded.
\fIProc\fR
is a procedure with arguments and result that match
the type \fBTk_RestrictProc\fR:
.CS
typedef Tk_RestrictAction \fBTk_RestrictProc\fR(
ClientData \fIarg\fR,
XEvent *\fIeventPtr\fR);
.CE
The \fIarg\fR argument is a copy of the \fIarg\fR passed
to \fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR; it may be used to provide \fIproc\fR with
information it needs to filter events. The \fIeventPtr\fR points to
an event under consideration. \fIProc\fR returns a restrict action
(enumerated type \fBTk_RestrictAction\fR) that indicates what
\fBTk_DoOneEvent\fR should do with the event. If the return value is
\fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR should do with the event. If the return value is
\fBTK_PROCESS_EVENT\fR, then the event will be handled immediately.
If the return value is \fBTK_DEFER_EVENT\fR, then the event will be
left on the event queue for later processing. If the return value is
\fBTK_DISCARD_EVENT\fR, then the event will be removed from the event
queue and discarded without being processed.
.PP
\fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR uses its return value and \fIprevArgPtr\fR
|
︙ | | |
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
|
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
|
-
+
|
for a particular event to occur on a particular window but you do not
want to invoke any handlers for any other events). The
.QW obvious
solution in these situations is to call \fBXNextEvent\fR or
\fBXWindowEvent\fR, but these procedures cannot be used because
Tk keeps its own event queue that is separate from the X event
queue. Instead, call \fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR to set up a filter,
then call \fBTk_DoOneEvent\fR to retrieve the desired event(s).
then call \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR to retrieve the desired event(s).
.SH KEYWORDS
delay, event, filter, restriction
|
Changes to doc/SetAppName.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_SetAppName 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_SetAppName \- Set the name of an application for 'send' commands
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/SetCaret.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2002 ActiveState Corporation.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_SetCaretPos 3 8.4 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_SetCaretPos \- set the display caret location
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/SetClass.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_SetClass 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_SetClass, Tk_Class \- set or retrieve a window's class
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/SetClassProcs.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_SetClassProcs 3 8.4 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_SetClassProcs \- register widget specific procedures
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
|
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
|
-
+
|
.PP
\fBTk_SetClassProcs\fR is called to register a set of procedures that
are used as callbacks in different places.
.PP
The structure pointed to by \fIprocs\fR contains the following:
.CS
typedef struct Tk_ClassProcs {
unsigned int \fIsize\fR;
size_t \fIsize\fR;
Tk_ClassWorldChangedProc *\fIworldChangedProc\fR;
Tk_ClassCreateProc *\fIcreateProc\fR;
Tk_ClassModalProc *\fImodalProc\fR;
} \fBTk_ClassProcs\fR;
.CE
The \fIsize\fR field is used to simplify future expansion of the
structure. It should always be set to (literally) \fBsizeof(Tk_ClassProcs)\fR.
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/SetGrid.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_SetGrid 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_SetGrid, Tk_UnsetGrid \- control the grid for interactive resizing
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/SetOptions.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
|
-
+
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_SetOptions 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_CreateOptionTable, Tk_DeleteOptionTable, Tk_InitOptions, Tk_SetOptions, Tk_FreeSavedOptions, Tk_RestoreSavedOptions, Tk_GetOptionValue, Tk_GetOptionInfo, Tk_FreeConfigOptions, Tk_Offset \- process configuration options
Tk_CreateOptionTable, Tk_DeleteOptionTable, Tk_InitOptions, Tk_SetOptions, Tk_FreeSavedOptions, Tk_RestoreSavedOptions, Tk_GetOptionValue, Tk_GetOptionInfo, Tk_FreeConfigOptions \- process configuration options
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_OptionTable
\fBTk_CreateOptionTable(\fIinterp, templatePtr\fB)\fR
.sp
|
︙ | | |
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
|
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
|
-
-
-
-
+
|
Tcl_Obj *
\fBTk_GetOptionValue(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin\fB)\fR
.sp
Tcl_Obj *
\fBTk_GetOptionInfo(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_FreeConfigOptions(\fIrecordPtr, optionTable, tkwin\fB)\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_Offset(\fItype, field\fB)\fR
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_SavedOptions "*const objv[]" in/out
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
A Tcl interpreter. Most procedures use this only for returning error
messages; if it is NULL then no error messages are returned. For
\fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR the value cannot be NULL; it gives the
interpreter in which the option table will be used.
.AP "const Tk_OptionSpec" *templatePtr in
Points to an array of static information that describes the configuration
options that are supported. Used to build a Tk_OptionTable. The information
pointed to by this argument must exist for the lifetime of the Tk_OptionTable.
.AP Tk_OptionTable optionTable in
Token for an option table. Must have been returned by a previous call
to \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR.
.AP char *recordPtr in/out
.AP void *recordPtr in/out
Points to structure in which values of configuration options are stored;
fields of this record are modified by procedures such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR
and read by procedures such as \fBTk_GetOptionValue\fR.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
For options such as \fBTK_OPTION_COLOR\fR, this argument indicates
the window in which the option will be used. If \fIoptionTable\fR uses
no window-dependent options, then a NULL value may be supplied for
|
︙ | | |
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
|
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
|
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
|
(e.g., because \fInamePtr\fR contains an unknown option name) then NULL
is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result unless
\fIinterp\fR is NULL.
.PP
\fBTk_FreeConfigOptions\fR must be invoked when a widget is deleted.
It frees all of the resources associated with any of the configuration
options defined in \fIrecordPtr\fR by \fIoptionTable\fR.
.PP
The \fBTk_Offset\fR macro is provided as a safe way of generating the
\fIobjOffset\fR and \fIinternalOffset\fR values for entries in
Tk_OptionSpec structures. It takes two arguments: the name of a type
of record, and the name of a field in that record. It returns the byte
offset of the named field in records of the given type.
.SH "TEMPLATES"
.PP
The array of Tk_OptionSpec structures passed to \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR
via its \fItemplatePtr\fR argument describes the configuration options
supported by a particular class of widgets. Each structure specifies
one configuration option and has the following fields:
.CS
typedef struct {
Tk_OptionType \fItype\fR;
const char *\fIoptionName\fR;
const char *\fIdbName\fR;
const char *\fIdbClass\fR;
const char *\fIdefValue\fR;
int \fIobjOffset\fR;
int \fIinternalOffset\fR;
size_t \fIobjOffset\fR;
size_t \fIinternalOffset\fR;
int \fIflags\fR;
const void *\fIclientData\fR;
int \fItypeMask\fR;
} \fBTk_OptionSpec\fR;
.CE
The \fItype\fR field indicates what kind of configuration option this is
(e.g. \fBTK_OPTION_COLOR\fR for a color value, or \fBTK_OPTION_INT\fR for
|
︙ | | |
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
|
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
|
-
+
|
\fIdbName\fR is NULL then the option database is not used by
\fBTk_InitOptions\fR for this option. The \fIdefValue\fR field
specifies a default value for this configuration option if no
value is specified in the option database. The \fIobjOffset\fR and
\fIinternalOffset\fR fields indicate where to store the value of this
option in widget records (more on this below); values for the \fIobjOffset\fR
and \fIinternalOffset\fR fields should always be generated with the
\fBTk_Offset\fR macro.
\fBoffsetof\fR macro.
The \fIflags\fR field contains additional information
to control the processing of this configuration option (see below
for details).
\fIClientData\fR provides additional type-specific data needed
by certain types. For instance, for \fBTK_OPTION_COLOR\fR types,
\fIclientData\fR is a string giving the default value to use on
monochrome displays. See the descriptions of the different types
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/SetVisual.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_SetWindowVisual 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_SetWindowVisual \- change visual characteristics of window
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/StrictMotif.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_StrictMotif 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_StrictMotif \- Return value of tk_strictMotif variable
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/TkInitStubs.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1999 Scriptics Corporation
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_InitStubs 3 8.4 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_InitStubs \- initialize the Tk stubs mechanism
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/Tk_Init.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Tk_Init 3 8.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_Init, Tk_SafeInit \- add Tk to an interpreter and make a new Tk application.
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/bell.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\" Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH bell n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
bell \- Ring a display's bell
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/bind.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\" Copyright (c) 1998 by Scriptics Corporation.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH bind n 8.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
bind \- Arrange for X events to invoke Tcl scripts
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
|
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
|
-
+
|
there is no reliable way to track changes to a window's
position in the stacking order.
.RE
.SS "EVENT DETAILS"
.PP
The last part of a long event specification is \fIdetail\fR. In the
case of a \fBButtonPress\fR or \fBButtonRelease\fR event, it is the
number of a button (1\-5). If a button number is given, then only an
number of a button (1\-9). If a button number is given, then only an
event on that particular button will match; if no button number is
given, then an event on any button will match. Note: giving a
specific button number is different than specifying a button modifier;
in the first case, it refers to a button being pressed or released,
while in the second it refers to some other button that is already
depressed when the matching event occurs. If a button
number is given then \fItype\fR may be omitted: if will default
|
︙ | | |
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
|
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
|
-
-
+
+
|
The path name of the window to which the event was reported (the
\fIwindow\fR field from the event). Valid for all event types.
.IP "\fB%X\fR, \fB%Y\fR" 5
The \fIx_root\fR and \fIy_root\fR fields from the event.
If a virtual-root window manager is being used then the substituted
values are the corresponding x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the virtual root.
Valid only for
\fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR,
and \fBMotion\fR events.
\fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBKeyPress\fR,
\fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBLeave\fR and \fBMotion\fR events.
Same meaning as \fB%x\fR and \fB%y\fR, except relative to the (virtual) root
window.
.LP
The replacement string for a %-replacement is formatted as a proper
Tcl list element.
This means that spaces or special characters such as \fB$\fR and
\fB{\fR may be preceded by backslashes.
|
︙ | | |
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
|
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
|
-
-
+
+
+
|
The following tests are applied, in order, to determine which of
several matching sequences is more specific:
.RS
.IP (a)
an event pattern that specifies a specific button or key is more specific
than one that does not;
.IP (b)
a longer sequence (in terms of number
of events matched) is more specific than a shorter sequence;
a sequence with the most highest-ordered patterns (in term of highest
repetition count) is more specific than a sequence with less
highest-ordered patterns;
.IP (c)
if the modifiers specified in one pattern are a subset of the
modifiers in another pattern, then the pattern with more modifiers
is more specific;
.IP (d)
a virtual event whose physical pattern matches the sequence is less
specific than the same physical pattern that is not associated with a
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/bindtags.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH bindtags n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
bindtags \- Determine which bindings apply to a window, and order of evaluation
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/bitmap.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH bitmap n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
bitmap \- Images that display two colors
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/busy.n.
︙ | | |
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
|
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
|
-
+
+
+
-
-
+
+
|
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH busy n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
busy \- confine pointer events to a window sub-tree
busy \- Make Tk widgets busy, temporarily blocking user interactions
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBtk busy\fR \fIwindow \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.sp
\fBtk busy busywindow \fIwindow\fR
.sp
\fBtk busy hold\fR \fIwindow \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.sp
\fBtk busy configure \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
.sp
\fBtk busy forget\fR \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow \fR?...
.sp
\fBtk busy current\fR ?\fIpattern\fR?
.sp
\fBtk busy status \fIwindow\fR
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBtk busy\fR command provides a simple means to block pointer events from
Tk widgets, while overriding the widget's cursor with a configurable busy
The \fBtk busy\fR command provides a simple means to block mouse pointer events
from Tk widgets, while overriding the widget's cursor with a configurable busy
cursor. Note this command does not prevent keyboard events from being sent to
the widgets made busy.
.SH INTRODUCTION
.PP
There are many times in applications where you want to temporarily restrict
what actions the user can take. For example, an application could have a
.QW Run
|
︙ | | |
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
|
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
|
-
+
-
-
-
+
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
|
.PP
The following operations are available for the \fBtk busy\fR command:
.TP
\fBtk busy \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
.
Shortcut for \fBtk busy hold\fR command.
.TP
\fBtk busy hold \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
\fBtk busy busywindow \fIwindow\fR
.
Makes the specified \fIwindow\fR (and its descendants in the Tk window
hierarchy) appear busy. \fIWindow\fR must be a valid path name of a Tk widget.
A transparent window is put in front of the specified window. This transparent
Returns the pathname of the busy window (i.e. the transparent window
window is mapped the next time idle tasks are processed, and the specified
window and its descendants will be blocked from user interactions. Normally
shielding the window appearing busy) created by the \fBtk busy hold\fR
\fBupdate\fR should be called immediately afterward to insure that the hold
operation is in effect before the application starts its processing. The
following configuration options are valid:
.RS
.TP
\fB\-cursor \fIcursorName\fR
command for \fIwindow\fR, or the empty string if \fIwindow\fR is not busy.
.
Specifies the cursor to be displayed when the widget is made busy.
\fICursorName\fR can be in any form accepted by \fBTk_GetCursor\fR. The
default cursor is \fBwait\fR on Windows and \fBwatch\fR on other platforms.
.RE
.TP
\fBtk busy cget \fIwindow\fR \fIoption\fR
.
Queries the \fBtk busy\fR command configuration options for \fIwindow\fR.
\fIWindow\fR must be the path name of a widget previously made busy by the
\fBhold\fR operation. The command returns the present value of the specified
\fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the
|
︙ | | |
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
|
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
|
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
+
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
+
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
|
specified for it by either \fBoption\fR command:
.PP
.CS
option add *frame.busyCursor gumby
option add *Frame.BusyCursor gumby
.CE
.RE
.TP
\fBtk busy current \fR?\fIpattern\fR?
.
Returns the pathnames of all widgets that are currently busy. If a
\fIpattern\fR is given, only the path names of busy widgets matching
\fIpattern\fR are returned.
.TP
\fBtk busy forget \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwindow\fR?...
.
Releases resources allocated by the \fBtk busy\fR command for \fIwindow\fR,
including the transparent window. User events will again be received by
\fIwindow\fR. Resources are also released when \fIwindow\fR is destroyed.
\fIWindow\fR must be the name of a widget specified in the \fBhold\fR
operation, otherwise an error is reported.
.TP
\fBtk busy current \fR?\fIpattern\fR?
\fBtk busy hold \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
.
Returns the pathnames of all widgets that are currently busy. If a
\fIpattern\fR is given, only the path names of busy widgets matching
\fIpattern\fR are returned.
Makes the specified \fIwindow\fR (and its descendants in the Tk window
hierarchy) appear busy. \fIWindow\fR must be a valid path name of a Tk widget.
A transparent window is put in front of the specified window. This transparent
window is mapped the next time idle tasks are processed, and the specified
window and its descendants will be blocked from user interactions. Normally
\fBupdate\fR should be called immediately afterward to insure that the hold
operation is in effect before the application starts its processing. The
command returns the pathname of the busy window that was created (i.e. the
transparent window shielding the window appearing busy). The following
configuration options are valid:
.RS
.TP
\fB\-cursor \fIcursorName\fR
.
Specifies the cursor to be displayed when the widget is made busy.
\fICursorName\fR can be in any form accepted by \fBTk_GetCursor\fR. The
default cursor is \fBwait\fR on Windows and \fBwatch\fR on other platforms.
.RE
.TP
\fBtk busy status \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns the status of a widget \fIwindow\fR. If \fIwindow\fR presently can not
receive user interactions, \fB1\fR is returned, otherwise \fB0\fR.
.SH "EVENT HANDLING"
.SS BINDINGS
.PP
The event blocking feature is implemented by creating and mapping a
transparent window that completely covers the widget. When the busy window is
mapped, it invisibly shields the widget and its hierarchy from all events that
may be sent. Like Tk widgets, busy windows have widget names in the Tk window
hierarchy. This means that you can use the \fBbind\fR command, to handle
events in the busy window.
hierarchy. This means that you can use the \fBbind\fR command to handle
events in the busy window:
.PP
.CS
\fBtk busy\fR hold .frame.canvas
bind .frame.canvas_Busy <Enter> { ... }
bind [\fBtk busy\fR busywindow .frame.canvas] <Enter> { ... }
.CE
.PP
Normally the busy window is a sibling of the widget. The name of the busy
window is
or
.QW \fIwidget\fB_Busy\fR
where \fIwidget\fR is the name of the widget to be made busy. In the previous
example, the pathname of the busy window is
.QW \fB.frame.canvas_Busy\fR .
The exception is when the widget is a toplevel widget (such as
.QW . )
where the busy window can't be made a sibling. The busy window is then a child
of the widget named
.QW \fIwidget\fB._Busy\fR
where \fIwidget\fR is the name of the toplevel widget. In the following
example, the pathname of the busy window is
.QW \fB._Busy\fR .
.PP
.CS
\fBtk busy\fR hold .
bind ._Busy <Enter> { ... }
set busyWin [\fBtk busy\fR hold .frame.canvas]
bind $busyWin <Enter> { ... }
.CE
.SS "ENTER/LEAVE EVENTS"
.PP
Mapping and unmapping busy windows generates Enter/Leave events for all
widgets they cover. Please note this if you are tracking Enter/Leave events in
widgets.
.SS "KEYBOARD EVENTS"
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/canvas.n.
︙ | | |
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
|
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
|
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
It is possible to adjust the origin of the canvas
coordinate system relative to the origin of the window using the
\fBxview\fR and \fByview\fR widget commands; this is typically used
for scrolling.
Canvases do not support scaling or rotation of the canvas coordinate
system relative to the window coordinate system.
.PP
Individual items may be moved or scaled using widget commands
described below, but they may not be rotated.
Individual items may be moved, scaled
.VS "8.7, TIP164"
or rotated
.VE "8.7, TIP164"
using widget commands
described below.
.PP
Note that the default origin of the canvas's visible area is
coincident with the origin for the whole window as that makes bindings
using the mouse position easier to work with; you only need to use the
\fBcanvasx\fR and \fBcanvasy\fR widget commands if you adjust the
origin of the visible area. However, this also means that any focus
ring (as controlled by the \fB\-highlightthickness\fR option) and
|
︙ | | |
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
|
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
|
+
|
.PP
The second possible syntax is a character list containing only
5 possible characters
.QW "\fB.,-_ \fR" .
The space can be used
to enlarge the space between other line elements, and cannot
occur as the first position in the string. Some examples:
.PP
.CS
\-dash . \(-> \-dash {2 4}
\-dash - \(-> \-dash {6 4}
\-dash -. \(-> \-dash {6 4 2 4}
\-dash -.. \(-> \-dash {6 4 2 4 2 4}
\-dash {. } \(-> \-dash {2 8}
\-dash , \(-> \-dash {4 4}
|
︙ | | |
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
|
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
|
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
+
-
|
See \fBINDICES\fR above for a description of the
legal forms for \fIindex\fR.
Note: the insertion cursor is only displayed in an item if
that item currently has the keyboard focus (see the \fBfocus\fR widget
command, above), but the cursor position may
be set even when the item does not have the focus.
This command returns an empty string.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBimage \fIimagename\fR ?\fIsubsample\fR? ?\fIzoom\fR?
.
Draw the canvas into the Tk photo image named \fIimagename\fR. If a \fB-scrollregion\fR
has been defined then this will be the boundaries of the canvas region drawn and the
final size of the photo image. Otherwise the widget width and height with an origin
of 0,0 will be the size of the canvas region drawn and the final size of the photo
image. Optionally an integer \fIsubsample\fR factor may be given and the photo image
will be reduced in size. In addition to the \fIsubsample\fR an integer \fIzoom\fR
factor can also be given and the photo image will be enlarged. The image background
will be filled with the canvas background colour. The canvas widget does not need to
be mapped for this widget command to work, but at least one of it's ancestors must be
mapped.
This command returns an empty string.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBimove \fItagOrId index x y\fR
.VS 8.6
.
This command causes the \fIindex\fR'th coordinate of each of the items
indicated by \fItagOrId\fR to be relocated to the location (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR).
Each item interprets \fIindex\fR independently according to the rules
described in \fBINDICES\fR above. Out of the standard set of items, only line
and polygon items may have their coordinates relocated this way.
.VE 8.6
.TP
\fIpathName \fBindex \fItagOrId index\fR
.
This command returns a decimal string giving the numerical index
within \fItagOrId\fR corresponding to \fIindex\fR.
\fIIndex\fR gives a textual description of the desired position
as described in \fBINDICES\fR above.
|
︙ | | |
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
|
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
|
-
+
-
|
Move each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in the canvas coordinate
space by adding \fIxAmount\fR to the x-coordinate of each point
associated with the item and \fIyAmount\fR to the y-coordinate of
each point associated with the item.
This command returns an empty string.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBmoveto \fItagOrId xPos yPos\fR
.VS 8.6
.
Move the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in the canvas coordinate
space so that the first coordinate pair of the bottommost item with
tag \fItagOrId\fR is located at
position (\fIxPos\fR,\fIyPos\fR). \fIxPos\fR and \fIyPos\fR may be
the empty string, in which case the corresponding coordinate
will be unchanged. All items matching
\fItagOrId\fR remain in the same positions relative to each other.
This command returns an empty string.
.VE 8.6
.TP
\fIpathName \fBpostscript \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR?
.
Generate a Postscript representation for part or all of the canvas.
If the \fB\-file\fR option is specified then the Postscript is written
to a file and an empty string is returned; otherwise the Postscript
is returned as the result of the command.
|
︙ | | |
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
|
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
991
992
993
994
995
996
997
998
999
1000
1001
1002
|
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
+
|
Note: this command has no effect on window items. Window items always
obscure other item types, and the stacking order of window items is
determined by the \fBraise\fR command and \fBlower\fR command, not the
\fBraise\fR widget command and \fBlower\fR widget command for canvases.
.RE
.TP
\fIpathName \fBrchars \fItagOrId first last string\fR
.VS 8.6
.
This command causes the text or coordinates between \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR
for each of the items indicated by \fItagOrId\fR to be replaced by
\fIstring\fR. Each item interprets \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR independently
according to the rules described in \fBINDICES\fR above. Out of the standard
set of items, text items support this operation by altering their text as
directed, and line and polygon items support this operation by altering their
coordinate list (in which case \fIstring\fR should be a list of coordinates to
use as a replacement). The other items ignore this operation.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBrotate \fItagOrId xOrigin yOrigin angle\fR
.VS "8.7, TIP164"
Rotate the coordinates of all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in canvas
coordinate space.
\fIXOrigin\fR and \fIyOrigin\fR identify the origin for the rotation
operation and \fIangle\fR identifies the amount to rotate the coordinates
anticlockwise, in degrees. (Negative values rotate clockwise.)
This command returns an empty string.
.RS
.PP
Implementation note: not all item types work the same with rotations. In
particular,\fB bitmap\fR,\fB image\fR,\fB text\fR and\fB window\fR items only
rotate their anchor points and do not rotate the items themselves about those
points, and the \fBarc\fR, \fBoval\fR and \fBrectangle\fR types rotate about a
computed center point instead of moving the bounding box coordinates directly.
.PP
Some items (currently \fBarc\fR and\fB text\fR) have angles in their options;
this command \fIdoes not\fR affect those options.
.RE
.VE 8.6
.VE "8.7, TIP164"
.TP
\fIpathName \fBscale \fItagOrId xOrigin yOrigin xScale yScale\fR
.
Rescale the coordinates of all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in canvas
coordinate space.
\fIXOrigin\fR and \fIyOrigin\fR identify the origin for the scaling
operation and \fIxScale\fR and \fIyScale\fR identify the scale
|
︙ | | |
1106
1107
1108
1109
1110
1111
1112
1113
1114
1115
1116
1117
1118
1119
1120
1121
1122
1123
1124
1125
1126
1127
1128
1129
|
1143
1144
1145
1146
1147
1148
1149
1150
1151
1152
1153
1154
1155
1156
1157
1158
1159
1160
1161
1162
1163
1164
1165
1166
|
-
+
-
-
-
+
+
+
|
\fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR
.
This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to
\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR.
\fINumber\fR must be an integer.
\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR or an abbreviation
\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBpages\fR or \fBunits\fR or an abbreviation
of one of these.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right in units
of the \fBxScrollIncrement\fR option, if it is greater than zero,
or in units of one-tenth the window's width otherwise.
If \fIwhat is \fBpages\fR then the view
adjusts in units of nine-tenths the window's width.
If \fInumber\fR is negative then information farther to the left
becomes visible; if it is positive then information farther to the right
becomes visible.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right in units
of the \fBxScrollIncrement\fR option, if it is greater than zero,
or in units of one-tenth the window's width otherwise.
.RE
.TP
\fIpathName \fByview \fI?args\fR?
.
This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the
information displayed in the canvas's window.
It can take any of the following forms:
|
︙ | | |
1147
1148
1149
1150
1151
1152
1153
1154
1155
1156
1157
1158
1159
1160
1161
1162
1163
1164
1165
1166
1167
1168
1169
|
1184
1185
1186
1187
1188
1189
1190
1191
1192
1193
1194
1195
1196
1197
1198
1199
1200
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
|
-
+
-
-
-
+
+
+
|
\fIFraction\fR is a fraction between 0 and 1.
.TP
\fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR
.
This command adjusts the view in the window up or down according to
\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR.
\fINumber\fR must be an integer.
\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR.
\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBpages\fR or \fBunits\fR.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts up or down in units
of the \fByScrollIncrement\fR option, if it is greater than zero,
or in units of one-tenth the window's height otherwise.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBpages\fR then
the view adjusts in units of nine-tenths the window's height.
If \fInumber\fR is negative then higher information becomes
visible; if it is positive then lower information
becomes visible.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts up or down in units
of the \fByScrollIncrement\fR option, if it is greater than zero,
or in units of one-tenth the window's height otherwise.
.RE
.SH "OVERVIEW OF ITEM TYPES"
.PP
The sections below describe the various types of items supported
by canvas widgets. Each item type is characterized by two things:
first, the form of the \fBcreate\fR command used to create
instances of the type; and second, a set of configuration options
|
︙ | | |
1319
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1328
1329
1330
1331
1332
1333
1334
1335
1336
1337
1338
1339
1340
1341
1342
|
1356
1357
1358
1359
1360
1361
1362
1363
1364
1365
1366
1367
1368
1369
1370
1371
1372
1373
1374
1375
1376
1377
1378
1379
1380
1381
|
-
-
+
+
-
+
+
+
|
For arcs, wide outlines will be drawn centered on the edges of the
arc's region.
.SH "STANDARD ITEM TYPES"
.SS "ARC ITEMS"
.PP
Items of type \fBarc\fR appear on the display as arc-shaped regions.
An arc is a section of an oval delimited by two angles (specified
by the \fB\-start\fR and \fB\-extent\fR options) and displayed in
one of several ways (specified by the \fB\-style\fR option).
by either the \fB\-start\fR and \fB\-extent\fR options or the \fB\-height\fR option)
and displayed in one of several ways (specified by the \fB\-style\fR option).
Arcs are created with widget commands of the following form:
.CS
\fIpathName \fBcreate arc \fIx1 y1 x2 y2 \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
\fIpathName \fBcreate arc \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.CE
The arguments \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR, and \fIy2\fR or \fIcoordList\fR give
the coordinates of two diagonally opposite corners of a
rectangular region enclosing the oval that defines the arc.
rectangular region enclosing the oval that defines the arc (except when
\fB\-height\fR is specified - see below).
.
After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR
pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options
for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be
used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's
configuration. An arc item becomes the current item when the mouse pointer is
over any part that is painted or (when fully transparent) that would be
painted if both the \fB\-fill\fR and \fB\-outline\fR options were non-empty.
|
︙ | | |
1368
1369
1370
1371
1372
1373
1374
1375
1376
1377
1378
1379
1380
1381
|
1407
1408
1409
1410
1411
1412
1413
1414
1415
1416
1417
1418
1419
1420
1421
1422
1423
1424
1425
1426
1427
1428
1429
1430
1431
1432
1433
1434
1435
1436
1437
1438
1439
1440
1441
1442
1443
1444
1445
1446
1447
1448
|
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
modulo 360 is used as the extent.
.TP
\fB\-start \fIdegrees\fR
Specifies the beginning of the angular range occupied by the
arc.
\fIDegrees\fR is given in units of degrees measured counter-clockwise
from the 3-o'clock position; it may be either positive or negative.
.TP
\fB\-height \fIdistance\fR
Provides a shortcut for creating a circular arc segment by defining the
distance of the mid-point of the arc from its chord. When this option
is used the coordinates are interpreted as the start and end coordinates
of the chord, and the options \fB\-start\fR and \fB-extent\fR are ignored.
The value of \fIdistance\fR has the following meaning:
.RS
.PP
.RS
\fIdistance\fR > 0 creates a clockwise arc
.br
\fIdistance\fR < 0 creates an counter-clockwise arc
.br
\fIdistance\fR = 0 creates an arc as if this option had not been specified
.RE
.PP
If you want the arc to have a specific radius, \fIr\fR, use the formula:
.PP
.RS
\fIdistance\fR = \fIr\fR \(+- sqrt(\fIr\fR**2 - (chordLength / 2)**2)
.RE
.PP
choosing the minus sign for the minor arc and the plus sign for the major arc.
.PP
Note that \fBitemcget \-height\fR always returns 0 so that introspection code
can be kept simple.
.RE
.TP
\fB\-style \fItype\fR
Specifies how to draw the arc. If \fItype\fR is \fBpieslice\fR
(the default) then the arc's region is defined by a section
of the oval's perimeter plus two line segments, one between the center
of the oval and each end of the perimeter section.
If \fItype\fR is \fBchord\fR then the arc's region is defined
|
︙ | | |
1785
1786
1787
1788
1789
1790
1791
1792
1793
1794
1795
1796
1797
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
|
1852
1853
1854
1855
1856
1857
1858
1859
1860
1861
1862
1863
1864
1865
1866
1867
1868
1869
1870
1871
|
-
+
-
|
\fB\-stipple\fR \fB\-activestipple\fR
\fB\-disabledstipple\fR \fB\-state\fR
\fB\-tags\fR
.DE
The following extra options are supported for text items:
.TP
\fB\-angle \fIrotationDegrees\fR
.VS 8.6
.
\fIRotationDegrees\fR tells how many degrees to rotate the text anticlockwise
about the positioning point for the text; it may have any floating-point value
from 0.0 to 360.0. For example, if \fIrotationDegrees\fR is \fB90\fR, then the
text will be drawn vertically from bottom to top.
This option defaults to \fB0.0\fR.
.VE 8.6
.TP
\fB\-font \fIfontName\fR
Specifies the font to use for the text item.
\fIFontName\fR may be any string acceptable to \fBTk_GetFont\fR.
If this option is not specified, it defaults to a system-dependent
font.
.TP
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/chooseColor.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH tk_chooseColor n 4.2 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
tk_chooseColor \- pops up a dialog box for the user to select a color.
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/colors.n.
︙ | | |
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
|
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
|
-
-
+
+
+
-
+
|
yellow4 139 139 0
YellowGreen 154 205 50
.DE
.SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES"
.TP
\fBMac OS X\fR
.
On Mac OS X, the following additional system colors are available
(note that the actual color values depend on the currently active OS theme,
On macOS, the following additional system colors are available.
This first group contains all colors available in the HIToolbox library.
(Note that in some cases the actual color values may depend on the
and typically many of these will in fact be patterns rather than pure colors):
current Appearance.)
.RS
.DS
systemActiveAreaFill
systemAlertActiveText
systemAlertBackgroundActive
systemAlertBackgroundInactive
systemAlertInactiveText
|
︙ | | |
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
|
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
|
+
|
systemRootMenuActiveText
systemRootMenuDisabledText
systemRootMenuSelectedText
systemScrollBarDelimiterActive
systemScrollBarDelimiterInactive
systemSecondaryGroupBoxBackground
systemSecondaryHighlightColor
systemSelectedTabTextColor
systemSheetBackground
systemSheetBackgroundOpaque
systemSheetBackgroundTransparent
systemStaticAreaFill
systemSystemDetailText
systemTabFrontActiveText
systemTabFrontInactiveText
|
︙ | | |
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
|
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
|
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
systemWhiteText
systemWindowBody
systemWindowHeaderActiveText
systemWindowHeaderBackground
systemWindowHeaderInactiveText
.DE
.RE
.
The second group of MacOS colors below are based on Apple's "semantic"
NScolors. On OSX 10.14 (Mojave) and later these colors change value
when Dark Mode is enabled. However, the change is only observable
when the Apple window manager is drawing to the screen. So the
\fBwinfo rgb\fR command will return the color coordinates used in the
standard Aqua mode, even if Dark Mode has been selected in the system
preferences. The numbered systemWindowBackgroundColors are used in
the \fBttk::notebook\fR and \fBttk::labelframe\fR widgets to provide a
contrasting background. Each numbered color constrasts with its
predecessor.
.RS
.DS
systemControlAccentColor
systemControlTextColor
systemDisabledControlTextColor
systemLabelColor
systemSelectedTextBackgroundColor
systemSelectedTextColor
systemTextBackgroundColor
systemTextColor
systemWindowBackgroundColor
systemWindowBackgroundColor1
systemWindowBackgroundColor2
systemWindowBackgroundColor3
systemWindowBackgroundColor4
systemWindowBackgroundColor5
systemWindowBackgroundColor6
systemWindowBackgroundColor7
.DE
.RE
.TP
\fBWindows\fR
.
On Windows, the following additional system colors are available
(note that the actual color values depend on the currently active OS theme):
.RS
.DS
.ta 6c
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/console.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2001 Donal K. Fellows
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH console n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
console \- Control the console on systems without a real console
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/cursors.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
-
+
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
'\" All rights reserved.
'\"
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2006-2007 Daniel A. Steffen <[email protected]>
'\"
'\"
.TH cursors n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
cursors \- mouse cursors available in Tk
.BE
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/destroy.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH destroy n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
destroy \- Destroy one or more windows
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/dialog.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH tk_dialog n 4.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
tk_dialog \- Create modal dialog and wait for response
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/entry.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
|
-
+
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Scriptics Corporation.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH entry n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
entry \- Create and manipulate 'entry' one-line text entry widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBentry\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-background \-highlightthickness \-selectbackground
\-borderwidth \-insertbackground \-selectborderwidth
\-cursor \-insertborderwidth \-selectforeground
\-exportselection \-insertofftime \-takefocus
\-font \-insertontime \-textvariable
\-foreground \-insertwidth \-xscrollcommand
\-highlightbackground \-justify
\-highlightcolor \-relief
\-placeholder \-placeholderforeground
.SE
.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
.OP \-disabledbackground disabledBackground DisabledBackground
Specifies the background color to use when the entry is disabled. If
this option is the empty string, the normal background color is used.
.OP \-disabledforeground disabledForeground DisabledForeground
Specifies the foreground color to use when the entry is disabled. If
|
︙ | | |
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
|
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
|
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
|
way through the text appears at the left edge of the window.
\fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR
This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to
\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR.
\fINumber\fR must be an integer.
\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR or an abbreviation
\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBpages\fR or \fBunits\fR or an abbreviation
of one of these.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by
\fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display; if it is
\fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls.
If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left
become visible; if it is positive then characters farther to the right
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls.
If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left become
visible; if it is positive then characters farther to the right
become visible.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by
\fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display.
.RE
.SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS"
.PP
Tk automatically creates class bindings for entries that give them
the following default behavior. In the descriptions below,
.QW word
refers to a contiguous group of letters, digits, or
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/focus.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH focus n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
focus \- Manage the input focus
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/focusNext.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH tk_focusNext n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
tk_focusNext, tk_focusPrev, tk_focusFollowsMouse \- Utility procedures for managing the input focus.
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/fontchooser.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2008 Daniel A. Steffen <[email protected]>
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH fontchooser n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
fontchooser \- control font selection dialog
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/frame.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
|
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH frame n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
frame \- Create and manipulate 'frame' simple container widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBframe\fR \fIpathName\fR ?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-borderwidth \-highlightcolor \-pady
\-cursor \-highlightthickness \-relief
\-highlightbackground \-padx \-takefocus
.SE
.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
.OP \-background background Background
This option is the same as the standard \fB\-background\fR option
except that its value may also be specified as an empty string.
In this case, the widget will display no background or border, and
no colors will be consumed from its colormap for its background
and border.
.VS "8.7, TIP262"
An empty background will disable drawing the background image.
.OP \-backgroundimage backgroundImage BackgroundImage
This specifies an image to display on the frame's background within
the border of the frame (i.e., the image will be clipped by the
frame's highlight ring and border, if either are present); subwidgets
of the frame will be drawn on top. The image must have been created
with the \fBimage create\fR command. If specified as the empty string,
no image will be displayed.
.VE "8.7, TIP262"
.OP \-class class Class
Specifies a class for the window.
This class will be used when querying the option database for
the window's other options, and it will also be used later for
other purposes such as bindings.
The \fB\-class\fR option may not be changed with the \fBconfigure\fR
widget command.
|
︙ | | |
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
|
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
|
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
Specifies the desired height for the window in any of the forms
acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. If this option is less than or equal
to zero then the window will not request any size at all. Note that this
sets the total height of the frame, any \fB\-borderwidth\fR or similar is
not added. Normally \fB\-height\fR should not be used if a propagating
geometry manager, such as \fBgrid\fR or \fBpack\fR, is used within the
frame since the geometry manager will override the height of the frame.
.OP \-tile tile Tile
.VS "8.7, TIP262"
This specifies how to draw the background image (see
\fB\-backgroundimage\fR) on the frame.
If true (according to \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR), the image will be tiled
to fill the whole frame, with the origin of the first copy of the
image being the top left of the interior of the frame.
If false (the default), the image will be centered within the frame.
.VE "8.7, TIP262"
.OP \-visual visual Visual
Specifies visual information for the new window in any of the
forms accepted by \fBTk_GetVisual\fR.
If this option is not specified, the new window will use the same
visual as its parent.
The \fB\-visual\fR option may not be modified with the \fBconfigure\fR
widget command.
|
︙ | | |
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
|
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
|
-
+
+
+
+
+
|
or in the option database
to configure aspects of the frame such as its background color
and relief. The \fBframe\fR command returns the
path name of the new window.
.PP
A frame is a simple widget. Its primary purpose is to act as a
spacer or container for complex window layouts. The only features
of a frame are its background color and an optional 3-D border to make the
of a frame are its background and an optional 3-D border to make the
frame appear raised or sunken.
.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
.PP
The \fBframe\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
name is the same as the path name of the frame's window. This
command may be used to invoke various
operations on the widget. It has the following general form:
.PP
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
.CE
.PP
\fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as
the frame widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command. The following
commands are possible for frame widgets:
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBframe\fR
command.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? \fI?value option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/grab.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH grab n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
grab \- Confine pointer and keyboard events to a window sub-tree
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/grid.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH grid n 8.5 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
grid \- Geometry manager that arranges widgets in a grid
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
|
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
|
-
+
|
.TP
\fB\-sticky \fIstyle\fR
.
If a slave's cell is larger than its requested dimensions, this
option may be used to position (or stretch) the slave within its cell.
\fIStyle\fR is a string that contains zero or more of the characters
\fBn\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBe\fR or \fBw\fR.
The string can optionally contains spaces or
The string can optionally contain spaces or
commas, but they are ignored. Each letter refers to a side (north, south,
east, or west) that the slave will
.QW stick
to. If both \fBn\fR and \fBs\fR (or \fBe\fR and \fBw\fR) are
specified, the slave will be stretched to fill the entire
height (or width) of its cavity. The \fB\-sticky\fR option subsumes the
combination of \fB\-anchor\fR and \fB\-fill\fR that is used by \fBpack\fR.
|
︙ | | |
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
|
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
|
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
.
Removes each of the \fIslave\fRs from grid for its
master and unmaps their windows.
The slaves will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager.
The configuration options for that window are forgotten, so that if the
slave is managed once more by the grid geometry manager, the initial
default settings are used.
.RS
.PP
.VS TIP518
If the last slave of the master becomes unmanaged, this will also send
the virtual event \fB<<NoManagedChild>>\fR to the master; the master
may choose to resize itself (or otherwise respond) to such a change.
.VE TIP518
.RE
.TP
\fBgrid info \fIslave\fR
.
Returns a list whose elements are the current configuration state of
the slave given by \fIslave\fR in the same option-value form that
might be specified to \fBgrid configure\fR.
The first two elements of the list are
|
︙ | | |
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
|
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
|
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
Removes each of the \fIslave\fRs from grid for its
master and unmaps their windows.
The slaves will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager.
However, the configuration options for that window are remembered,
so that if the
slave is managed once more by the grid geometry manager, the previous
values are retained.
.RS
.PP
.VS TIP518
If the last slave of the master becomes unmanaged, this will also send
the virtual event \fB<<NoManagedChild>>\fR to the master; the master
may choose to resize itself (or otherwise respond) to such a change.
.VE TIP518
.RE
.TP
\fBgrid size \fImaster\fR
.
Returns the size of the grid (in columns then rows) for \fImaster\fR.
The size is determined either by the \fIslave\fR occupying the largest
row or column, or the largest column or row with a \fB\-minsize\fR,
\fB\-weight\fR, or \fB\-pad\fR that is non-zero.
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/image.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH image n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
image \- Create and manipulate images
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/label.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH label n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
label \- Create and manipulate 'label' non-interactive text or image widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/listbox.n.
︙ | | |
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
|
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
|
-
+
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
|
\fIfraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR
.
This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to
\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR.
\fINumber\fR must be an integer.
\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR or an abbreviation
\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBpages\fR or \fBunits\fR or an abbreviation
of one of these.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by
\fInumber\fR character units (the width of the \fB0\fR character)
on the display; if it is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by
\fInumber\fR screenfuls.
If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left
become visible; if it is positive then characters farther to the right
become visible.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by
\fInumber\fR character units (the width of the \fB0\fR character)
on the display.
.RE
.TP
\fIpathName \fByview \fR?\fIargs\fR?
.
This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the
text in the widget's window.
It can take any of the following forms:
|
︙ | | |
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
|
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
|
-
-
+
+
-
+
+
|
way through the listbox, and so on.
.TP
\fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR
.
This command adjusts the view in the window up or down according to
\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR.
\fINumber\fR must be an integer.
\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts up or down by
\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBpages\fR or \fBunits\fR.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBpages\fR then
\fInumber\fR lines; if it is \fBpages\fR then
the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls.
If \fInumber\fR is negative then earlier elements
become visible; if it is positive then later elements
become visible.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts up or down by
\fInumber\fR lines.
.RE
.SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS"
.PP
Tk automatically creates class bindings for listboxes that give them
Motif-like behavior. Much of the behavior of a listbox is determined
by its \fB\-selectmode\fR option, which selects one of four ways
of dealing with the selection.
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/lower.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH lower n 3.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
lower \- Change a window's position in the stacking order
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/menu.n.
︙ | | |
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
|
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
|
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
.nf
\fBmenu\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
\fBtk_menuSetFocus\fR \fIpathName\fR
.SO
\-activebackground \-borderwidth \-foreground
\-activeborderwidth \-cursor \-relief
\-activeforeground \-disabledforeground \-takefocus
\-background \-font
\-background \-font \-activerelief
.SE
.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
.OP \-postcommand postCommand Command
If this option is specified then it provides a Tcl command to execute
each time the menu is posted. The command is invoked by the \fBpost\fR
widget command before posting the menu. Note that in Tk 8.0 on Macintosh
and Windows, all post-commands in a system of menus are executed before any
of those menus are posted.
This is due to the limitations in the individual platforms' menu managers.
.OP \-selectcolor selectColor Background
For menu entries that are check buttons or radio buttons, this option
specifies the color to display in the indicator when the check button
or radio button is selected.
.OP \-tearoff tearOff TearOff
This option must have a proper boolean value, which specifies
whether or not the menu should include a tear-off entry at the
top. If so, it will exist as entry 0 of the menu and the other
entries will number starting at 1. The default
menu bindings arrange for the menu to be torn off when the tear-off
entry is invoked.
This option must have a proper boolean value (default is false),
which specifies whether or not the menu should include a tear-off
entry at the top. If so, it will exist as entry 0 of the menu and
the other entries will number starting at 1. The default menu
bindings arrange for the menu to be torn off when the tear-off entry
is invoked.
This option is ignored under Aqua/Mac OS X, where menus cannot
be torn off.
.OP \-tearoffcommand tearOffCommand TearOffCommand
If this option has a non-empty value, then it specifies a Tcl command
to invoke whenever the menu is torn off. The actual command will
consist of the value of this option, followed by a space, followed
by the name of the menu window, followed by a space, followed by
|
︙ | | |
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
|
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
|
-
+
|
contents are inserted into the standard Window menu of the user's
menubar whenever the window's menubar is in front. The first items in
the menu are provided by Mac OS X, and the names of the current
toplevels are automatically appended after all the Tk-defined items and
a separator. The Window menu on the Mac also allows toggling the
window into a fullscreen state, and managing a tabbed window interface
(multiple windows grouped into a single window) if supported by that
version of the operating system.
version of the operating system.
.PP
When Tk sees a .menubar.help menu on the Macintosh, the menu's contents
are appended to the standard Help menu of the user's menubar whenever
the window's menubar is in front. The first items in the menu
are provided by Mac OS X.
.PP
When Tk sees a System menu on Windows, its items are appended to the
|
︙ | | |
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
|
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
|
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
+
+
|
entry has a command associated with it then the result of that
command is returned as the result of the \fBinvoke\fR widget
command. Otherwise the result is an empty string. Note: invoking
a menu entry does not automatically unpost the menu; the default
bindings normally take care of this before invoking the \fBinvoke\fR
widget command.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBpost \fIx y\fR
\fIpathName \fBpost \fIx y\fR ?\fIindex\fR?
.
Arrange for the menu to be displayed on the screen at the root-window
coordinates given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR. These coordinates are
adjusted if necessary to guarantee that the entire menu is visible on
the screen. This command normally returns an empty string.
If the \fB\-postcommand\fR option has been specified, then its value is
executed as a Tcl script before posting the menu and the result of
that script is returned as the result of the \fBpost\fR widget
coordinates given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR. If an index is specified
the menu will be located so that the entry with that index is
displayed at the point. These coordinates are adjusted if necessary to
guarantee that the entire menu is visible on the screen. This command
normally returns an empty string. If the \fB\-postcommand\fR option
has been specified, then its value is executed as a Tcl script before
posting the menu and the result of that script is returned as the
result of the \fBpost\fR widget command. If an error returns while
command.
If an error returns while executing the command, then the error is
returned without posting the menu.
executing the command, then the error is returned without posting the
menu.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBpostcascade \fIindex\fR
.
Posts the submenu associated with the cascade entry given by
\fIindex\fR, and unposts any previously posted submenu.
If \fIindex\fR does not correspond to a cascade entry,
or if \fIpathName\fR is not posted,
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/menubar.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH tk_menuBar n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
tk_menuBar, tk_bindForTraversal \- Obsolete support for menu bars
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/menubutton.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH menubutton n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
menubutton \- Create and manipulate 'menubutton' pop-up menu indicator widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/message.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH message n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
message \- Create and manipulate 'message' non-interactive text widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/option.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH option n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
option \- Add/retrieve window options to/from the option database
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/optionMenu.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH tk_optionMenu n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
tk_optionMenu \- Create an option menubutton and its menu
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/options.n.
︙ | | |
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
|
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
|
+
+
+
|
definition of active elements.
The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
This option is typically only available in widgets displaying more
than one element at a time (e.g. menus but not buttons).
.OP \-activeforeground activeForeground Background
Specifies foreground color to use when drawing active elements.
See above for definition of active elements.
.OP \-activerelief activeRelief Relief
Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the active item of the widget.
See the \fB-relief\fR option for details.
.OP \-anchor anchor Anchor
Specifies how the information in a widget (e.g. text or a bitmap)
is to be displayed in the widget.
Must be one of the values \fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBe\fR, \fBse\fR,
\fBs\fR, \fBsw\fR, \fBw\fR, \fBnw\fR, or \fBcenter\fR.
For example, \fBnw\fR means display the information such that its
top-left corner is at the top-left corner of the widget.
|
︙ | | |
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
|
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
|
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
this amount to the height it would normally need (as determined by
the height of the things displayed in the widget); if the geometry
manager can satisfy this request, the widget will end up with extra
internal space above and/or below what it displays inside.
Most widgets only use this option for padding text: if they are
displaying a bitmap or image, then they usually ignore padding
options.
.OP \-placeholder placeHolder PlaceHolder
Specifies a help text string to display if no text is otherwise displayed,
that is when the widget is empty. The placeholder text is displayed using
the values of the \fB\-font\fR and \fB\-justify\fR options.
.OP \-placeholderforeground placeholderForeground PlaceholderForeground
Specifies the foreground color to use when the placeholder text is
displayed. If this option is the empty string, the default color gray70
is used.
.OP \-relief relief Relief
Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the widget. Acceptable
values are \fBraised\fR, \fBsunken\fR, \fBflat\fR, \fBridge\fR,
\fBsolid\fR, and \fBgroove\fR.
The value
indicates how the interior of the widget should appear relative
to its exterior; for example, \fBraised\fR means the interior of
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/pack-old.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH pack-old n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
pack-old \- Obsolete syntax for packer geometry manager
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/pack.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH pack n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
pack \- Geometry manager that packs around edges of cavity
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
|
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
|
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
than receiving default values.
.RE
.TP
\fBpack forget \fIslave \fR?\fIslave ...\fR?
Removes each of the \fIslave\fRs from the packing order for its
master and unmaps their windows.
The slaves will no longer be managed by the packer.
.RS
.PP
.VS TIP518
If the last slave of the master becomes unmanaged, this will also send
the virtual event \fB<<NoManagedChild>>\fR to the master; the master
may choose to resize itself (or otherwise respond) to such a change.
.VE TIP518
.RE
.TP
\fBpack info \fIslave\fR
Returns a list whose elements are the current configuration state of
the slave given by \fIslave\fR in the same option-value form that
might be specified to \fBpack configure\fR.
The first two elements of the list are
.QW "\fB\-in \fImaster\fR"
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/palette.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH tk_setPalette n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
tk_setPalette, tk_bisque \- Modify the Tk color palette
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/panedwindow.n.
︙ | | |
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
|
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
|
-
+
|
adjusted.
.PP
When a pane is resized from outside (e.g. it is packed to expand and
fill, and the containing toplevel is resized), space is added to the final
(rightmost or bottommost) pane in the window.
.PP
Unlike slave windows managed by e.g. pack or grid, the panes managed by a
panedwindow do not change width or height to accomodate changes in the
panedwindow do not change width or height to accommodate changes in the
requested widths or heights of the panes, once these have become mapped.
Therefore it may be advisable, particularly when creating layouts
interactively, to not add a pane to the panedwindow widget until after the
geometry requests of that pane has been finalized (i.e., all components of
the pane inserted, all options affecting geometry set to their proper
values, etc.).
.SH "SEE ALSO"
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/photo.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
|
-
+
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
-
+
-
+
+
+
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Australian National University
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
'\" Author: Paul Mackerras ([email protected]),
'\" Department of Computer Science,
'\" Australian National University.
'\"
.TH photo n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
photo \- Full-color images
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fBimage create photo \fR?\fIname\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR?
\fIimageName \fBblank\fR
\fIimageName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
\fIimageName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
\fIimageName \fBcopy \fIsourceImage\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
\fIimageName \fBdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
\fIimageName \fBget \fIx y\fR
\fIimageName \fBget \fIx y\fR ?\fIoption\fR?
\fIimageName \fBput \fIdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
\fIimageName \fBread \fIfilename\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
\fIimageName \fBredither\fR
\fIimageName \fBtransparency \fIsubcommand \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
\fIimageName \fBwrite \fIfilename\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
A photo is an image whose pixels can display any color or be
transparent. A photo image is stored internally in full color (32
bits per pixel), and is displayed using dithering if necessary. Image
data for a photo image can be obtained from a file or a string, or it
can be supplied from
C code through a procedural interface. At present, only
A photo is an image whose pixels can display any color with a varying
degree of transparency (the alpha channel). A photo image is stored
internally in full color (32 bits per pixel), and is displayed using
dithering if necessary. Image data for a photo image can be obtained
from a file or a string, or it can be supplied from C code through a
procedural interface. At present, only
.VS 8.6
PNG,
.VE 8.6
GIF and PPM/PGM
formats are supported, but an interface exists to allow additional
image file formats to be added easily. A photo image is transparent
in regions where no image data has been supplied
or where it has been set transparent by the \fBtransparency set\fR
subcommand.
GIF and PPM/PGM formats are supported, but an interface exists to
allow additional image file formats to be added easily. A photo image
is (semi)transparent if the image data it was obtained from had
transparency informaton. In regions where no image data has been
supplied, it is fully transparent. Transparency may also be modified
with the \fBtransparency set\fR subcommand.
.SH "CREATING PHOTOS"
.PP
Like all images, photos are created using the \fBimage create\fR
command.
Photos support the following \fIoptions\fR:
.TP
\fB\-data \fIstring\fR
.
Specifies the contents of the image as a string. The string should
contain binary data or, for some formats, base64-encoded data (this is
Specifies the contents of the image as a string.
.VS 8.7
The string should
contain data in the default list-of-lists form,
.VE 8.7
binary data or, for some formats, base64-encoded data (this is
currently guaranteed to be supported for PNG and GIF images). The
format of the
string must be one of those for which there is an image file format
handler that will accept string data. If both the \fB\-data\fR
and \fB\-file\fR options are specified, the \fB\-file\fR option takes
precedence.
format of the string must be one of those for which there is an image
file format handler that will accept string data. If both the
\fB\-data\fR and \fB\-file\fR options are specified, the \fB\-file\fR
option takes precedence.
.TP
\fB\-format \fIformat-name\fR
\fB\-format\fR {\fIformat-name\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?}
.
Specifies the name of the file format for the data specified with the
\fB\-data\fR or \fB\-file\fR option.
\fB\-data\fR or \fB\-file\fR option and optional arguments passed to
the format handler. Note: the value of this option must be a Tcl list.
This means that the braces may be omitted if the argument has only one
word. Also, instead of braces, double quotes may be used for quoting.
.TP
\fB\-file \fIname\fR
.
\fIname\fR gives the name of a file that is to be read to supply data
for the photo image. The file format must be one of those for which
there is an image file format handler that can read data.
.TP
|
︙ | | |
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
|
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
|
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
+
-
+
+
+
+
+
-
+
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
+
-
+
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
+
-
+
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
+
+
+
+
|
is set, the old contents of the destination image are discarded and
the source image is used as-is. The default compositing rule is
\fIoverlay\fR.
.RE
.TP
\fIimageName \fBdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
.
Returns image data in the form of a string. The following options
may be specified:
Returns image data in the form of a string.
.VS 8.7
The format of the string depends on the format handler. By default, a
human readable format as a list of lists of pixel data is used, other
formats can be chosen with the \fB-format\fR option.
See \fBIMAGE FORMATS\fR below for details.
.VE 8.7
The following options may be specified:
.RS
.TP
\fB\-background\fI color\fR
.
If the color is specified, the data will not contain any transparency
information. In all transparent pixels the color will be replaced by
the specified color.
.TP
\fB\-format\fI format-name\fR
\fB\-format\fR {\fIformat-name\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?}
.
Specifies the name of the image file format handler to be used.
Specifically, this subcommand searches
for the first handler whose name matches an initial substring of
\fIformat-name\fR and which has the capability to write a string
containing this image data.
If this option is not given, this subcommand uses a format that
consists of a list (one element per row) of lists (one element per
pixel/column) of colors in
Specifies the name of the image file format handler to use and,
optionally, arguments to the format handler. Specifically, this
subcommand searches for the first handler whose name matches an
initial substring of \fIformat-name\fR and which has the capability to
write a string containing this image data.
.VS 8.7
If this option is not given, this subcommand uses the default format
that consists of a list (one element per row) of lists (one element
per pixel/column) of colors in
.QW \fB#\fIrrggbb\fR
format (where \fIrr\fR is a pair of hexadecimal digits for the red
format (see \fBIMAGE FORMATS\fR below).
channel, \fIgg\fR for green, and \fIbb\fR for blue).
.VE 8.7
Note: the value of this option must be a Tcl list.
This means that the braces may be omitted if the argument has only one
word. Also, instead of braces, double quotes may be used for quoting.
.TP
\fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR
.
Specifies a rectangular region of \fIimageName\fR to be returned.
If only \fIx1\fR and \fIy1\fR are specified, the region
extends from \fI(x1,y1)\fR to the bottom-right corner of
\fIimageName\fR. If all four coordinates are given, they specify
diagonally opposite corners of the rectangular region, including x1,y1
and excluding x2,y2. The default, if this option is not given, is the
whole image.
.TP
\fB\-grayscale\fR
.
If this options is specified, the data will not contain color
information. All pixel data will be transformed into grayscale.
.RE
.VS 8.7
.TP
\fIimageName \fBget\fR \fIx y\fR
\fIimageName \fBget\fR \fIx y\fR ?\fB-withalpha\fR?
.
Returns the color of the pixel at coordinates (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) in the
image as a list of three integers between 0 and 255, representing the
red, green and blue components respectively.
red, green and blue components respectively. If the \fB-withalpha\fR
option is specified, the returned list will have a fourth element
representing the alpha value of the pixel as an integer between 0 and
255.
.VE 8.7
.TP
\fIimageName \fBput\fR \fIdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
.
Sets pixels in \fI imageName\fR to the data specified in \fIdata\fR.
.VS 8.7
This command first searches the list of image file format handlers for
This command searches the list of image file format handlers for
a handler that can interpret the data in \fIdata\fR, and then reads
the image encoded within into \fIimageName\fR (the destination image).
If \fIdata\fR does not match any known format, an attempt to interpret
See \fBIMAGE FORMATS\fR below for details on formats for image data.
it as a (top-to-bottom) list of scan-lines is made, with each
scan-line being a (left-to-right) list of pixel colors (see
.VE 8.7
\fBTk_GetColor\fR for a description of valid colors.) Every scan-line
must be of the same length. Note that when \fIdata\fR is a single
color name, you are instructing Tk to fill a rectangular region with
that color. The following options may be specified:
The following options may be specified:
.RS
.TP
\fB\-format \fIformat-name\fR
\fB\-format\fR {\fIformat-name\fR ?\fIoption value ..\fR?}
.
Specifies the format of the image data in \fIdata\fR.
Specifies the format of the image data in \fIdata\fR and, optionally,
arguments to be passed to the format handler.
Specifically, only image file format handlers whose names begin with
\fIformat-name\fR will be used while searching for an image data
format handler to read the data.
Note: the value of this option must be a Tcl list.
This means that the braces may be omitted if the argument has only one
word. Also, instead of braces, double quotes may be used for quoting.
.TP
\fB\-to \fIx1 y1\fR ?\fIx2 y2\fR?
.
Specifies the coordinates of the top-left corner (\fIx1\fR,\fIy1\fR)
of the region of \fIimageName\fR into which the image data will be
copied. The default position is (0,0). If \fIx2\fR,\fIy2\fR is given
and \fIdata\fR is not large enough to cover the rectangle specified by
this option, the image data extracted will be tiled so it covers the
entire destination rectangle. If the region specified with this opion
is smaller than the supplied \fIdata\fR, the exceeding data is silently
entire destination rectangle. Note that if \fIdata\fR specifies a
discarded. Note that if \fIdata\fR specifies a
single color value, then a region extending to the bottom-right corner
represented by (\fIx2\fR,\fIy2\fR) will be filled with that color.
.RE
.TP
\fIimageName \fBread\fR \fIfilename\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
.
Reads image data from the file named \fIfilename\fR into the image.
This command first searches the list of
image file format handlers for a handler that can interpret the data
in \fIfilename\fR, and then reads the image in \fIfilename\fR into
\fIimageName\fR (the destination image). The following options may be
specified:
.RS
.TP
\fB\-format \fIformat-name\fR
\fB\-format {\fIformat-name\fR ?\fIoption value ..\fR?}
.
Specifies the format of the image data in \fIfilename\fR.
Specifies the format of the image data in \fIfilename\fR and,
optionally, additional options to the format handler.
Specifically, only image file format handlers whose names begin with
\fIformat-name\fR will be used while searching for an image data
format handler to read the data.
Note: the value of this option must be a Tcl list.
This means that the braces may be omitted if the argument has only one
word. Also, instead of braces, double quotes may be used for quoting.
.TP
\fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR
.
Specifies a rectangular sub-region of the image file data to be copied
to the destination image. If only \fIx1\fR and \fIy1\fR are
specified, the region extends from (\fIx1,y1\fR) to the bottom-right
corner of the image in the image file. If all four coordinates are
|
︙ | | |
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
|
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
|
+
-
+
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
+
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
+
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
displayed.
.TP
\fIimageName \fBtransparency \fIsubcommand \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
.
Allows examination and manipulation of the transparency information in
the photo image. Several subcommands are available:
.RS
.VS 8.7
.TP
\fIimageName \fBtransparency get \fIx y\fR
\fIimageName \fBtransparency get \fIx y\fR ?\fB-alpha\fR?
.
Returns a boolean indicating if the pixel at (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) is
transparent.
Returns true if the pixel at (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) is fully transparent,
false otherwise. If the option \fB-alpha\fR is passed, returns the
alpha value of the pixel instead, as an integer in the range 0 to 255.
.VE 8.7
.VS 8.7
.TP
\fIimageName \fBtransparency set \fIx y boolean\fR
\fIimageName \fBtransparency set \fIx y\fR \fInewVal\fR ?\fB-alpha\fR?
.
Makes the pixel at (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) transparent if \fIboolean\fR is
true, and makes that pixel opaque otherwise.
Change the transparency of the pixel at (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) to
\fInewVal.\fR If no additional option is passed, \fInewVal\fR is
interpreted as a boolean and the pixel is made fully transparent if
that value is true, fully opaque otherwise. If the \fB-alpha\fR
option is passed, \fInewVal\fR is interpreted as an integral alpha
value for the pixel, which must be in the range 0 to 255.
.VE 8.7
.RE
.TP
\fIimageName \fBwrite \fIfilename\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
.
Writes image data from \fIimageName\fR to a file named \fIfilename\fR.
The following options may be specified:
.RS
.TP
\fB\-background\fI color\fR
.
If the color is specified, the data will not contain any transparency
information. In all transparent pixels the color will be replaced by
the specified color.
.TP
\fB\-format\fI format-name\fR
\fB\-format\fR {\fIformat-name\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?}
.
Specifies the name of the image file format handler to be used to
write the data to the file and, optionally, options to pass to the
write the data to the file. Specifically, this subcommand searches
for the first handler whose name matches an initial substring of
\fIformat-name\fR and which has the capability to write an image
file. If this option is not given, the format is guessed from
the file extension. If that cannot be determined, this subcommand
uses the first handler that has the capability to write an image file.
format handler. Specifically, this subcommand searches for the first
handler whose name matches an initial substring of \fIformat-name\fR
and which has the capability to write an image file. If this option
is not given, the format is guessed from the file extension. If that
cannot be determined, this subcommand uses the first handler that has
the capability to write an image file.
Note: the value of this option must be a Tcl list.
This means that the braces may be omitted if the argument has only one
word. Also, instead of braces, double quotes may be used for quoting.
.TP
\fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR
.
Specifies a rectangular region of \fIimageName\fR to be written to the
image file. If only \fIx1\fR and \fIy1\fR are specified, the region
extends from \fI(x1,y1)\fR to the bottom-right corner of
\fIimageName\fR. If all four coordinates are given, they specify
|
︙ | | |
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
|
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
|
+
+
+
+
+
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
.SH "IMAGE FORMATS"
.PP
The photo image code is structured to allow handlers for additional
image file formats to be added easily. The photo image code maintains
a list of these handlers. Handlers are added to the list by
registering them with a call to \fBTk_CreatePhotoImageFormat\fR. The
standard Tk distribution comes with handlers for PPM/PGM, PNG and GIF
formats,
.VS 8.7
as well as the \fBdefault\fR handler to encode/decode image
data in a human readable form.
.VE 8.7
formats, which are automatically registered on initialization.
These handlers are automatically registered on initialization.
.PP
When reading an image file or processing
string data specified with the \fB\-data\fR configuration option, the
photo image code invokes each handler in turn until one is
found that claims to be able to read the data in the file or string.
Usually this will find the correct handler, but if it does not, the
user may give a format name with the \fB\-format\fR option to specify
which handler to use. In fact the photo image code will try those
When reading an image file or processing string data specified with
the \fB\-data\fR configuration option, the photo image code invokes
each handler in turn until one is found that claims to be able to read
the data in the file or string. Usually this will find the correct
handler, but if it does not, the user may give a format name with the
\fB\-format\fR option to specify which handler to use. In this case,
the photo image code will try those handlers whose names begin with
handlers whose names begin with the string specified for the
\fB\-format\fR option (the comparison is case-insensitive). For
example, if the user specifies \fB\-format gif\fR, then a handler
named GIF87 or GIF89 may be invoked, but a handler
named JPEG may not (assuming that such handlers had been
the string specified for the \fB\-format\fR option (the comparison is
case-insensitive). For example, if the user specifies \fB\-format
gif\fR, then a handler named GIF87 or GIF89 may be invoked, but a
handler named JPEG may not (assuming that such handlers had been
registered).
.PP
When writing image data to a file, the processing of the
\fB\-format\fR option is slightly different: the string value given
for the \fB\-format\fR option must begin with the complete name of the
requested handler, and may contain additional information following
that, which the handler can use, for example, to specify which variant
to use of the formats supported by the handler.
Note that not all image handlers may support writing transparency data
to a file, even where the target image format does.
.VS 8.7
.SS "THE DEFAULT IMAGE HANDLER"
.PP
The \fBdefault\fR image handler cannot be used to read or write data
from/to a file. Its sole purpose is to encode and decode image data in
string form in a clear text, human readable, form. The \fIimageName\fR
\fBdata\fR subcommand uses this handler when no other format is
specified. When reading image data from a string with \fIimageName\fR
\fBput\fR or the \fB-data\fR option, the default handler is treated
as the other handlers.
.PP
Image data in the \fBdefault\fR string format is a (top-to-bottom)
list of scan-lines, with each scan-line being a (left-to-right) list
of pixel data. Every scan-line has the same length. The color
and, optionally, alpha value of each pixel is specified in any of
the forms described in the \fBCOLOR FORMATS\fR section below.
.VE 8.7
.SS "FORMAT SUBOPTIONS"
.PP
.VS 8.6
Some image formats support sub-options, which are specified at the time that
the image is loaded using additional words in the \fB\-format\fR option. At
the time of writing, the following are supported:
Image formats may support sub-options, wich ahre specified using
additional words in the value to the \fB\-format\fR option. These
suboptions can affect how image data is read or written to file or
string. The nature and values of these options is up to the format
handler.
The built-in handlers support these suboptions:
.VS 8.7
.TP
\fBdefault \-colorformat\fI formatType\fR
.
The option is allowed when writing image data to a string with
\fIimageName\fR \fBdata\fR. Specifies the format to use for the color
string of each pixel. \fIformatType\fR may be one of: \fBrgb\fR to
encode pixel data in the form \fB#\fIRRGGBB\fR, \fBrgba\fR to encode
pixel data in the form \fB#\fIRRGGBBAA\fR or \fBlist\fR to encode
pixel data as a list with four elements. See \fBCOLOR FORMATS\fR
below for details. The default is \fBrgb\fR.
.VE 8.7
.TP
\fBgif \-index\fI indexValue\fR
.
The option has effect when reading image data from a file. When
When parsing a multi-part GIF image, Tk normally only accesses the first
image. By giving the \fB\-index\fR sub-option, the \fIindexValue\fR'th value
may be used instead. The \fIindexValue\fR must be an integer from 0 up to the
number of image parts in the GIF data.
parsing a multi-part GIF image, Tk normally only accesses the first
image. By giving the \fB\-index\fR sub-option, the \fIindexValue\fR'th
value may be used instead. The \fIindexValue\fR must be an integer
from 0 up to the number of image parts in the GIF data.
.TP
\fBpng \-alpha\fI alphaValue\fR
.
The option has effect when reading image data from a file. Specifies
An additional alpha filtering for the overall image, which allows the
background on which the image is displayed to show through. This usually also
has the effect of desaturating the image. The \fIalphaValue\fR must be between
0.0 and 1.0.
an additional alpha filtering for the overall image, which allows the
background on which the image is displayed to show through. This
usually also has the effect of desaturating the image. The
\fIalphaValue\fR must be between 0.0 and 1.0.
.TP
\fBsvg \-dpi\fI dpiValue\fB \-scale\fI scaleValue\fB \-unit\fI unitValue\fR
.
\fIdpiValue\fR is used in conversion between given coordinates and
screen resolution. The value must be greater than 0 and the default
value is 96.
\fIscaleValue\fR is used to scale the resulting image. The value must
be greater than 0 and the default value is 1.
\fIunitValue\fR is the unit of all coordinates in the SVG data.
Available units are px (default, coordinates in pixel), pt (1/72 inch),
pc (12 pt), mm , cm and in.
The svg format supports a wide range of SVG features, but the
full SVG standard is not available, for instance the 'text' feature
is missing and silently ignores when reading the SVG data.
The supported SVG features are:
.
.RS
\fB elements:\fR g, path, rect, circle, ellipse, line, polyline, polygon,
linearGradient, radialGradient, stop, defs, svg, style
.PP
\fB attributes:\fR width, height, viewBox,
preserveAspectRatio with none, xMin, xMid, xMax, yMin, yMid, yMax, slice
.PP
\fB gradient attributes:\fR gradientUnits with objectBoundingBox,
gradientTransform, cx, cy, r fx, fy x1, y1, x2, y2
spreadMethod with pad, reflect or repeat,
xlink:href
.PP
\fB poly attributes: \fR points
.PP
\fB line attributes: \fR x1, y1, x2, y2
.PP
\fB ellipse attributes: \fR cx, cy, rx, ry
.PP
\fB circle attributes: \fR cx, cy, r
.PP
\fB rectangle attributes: \fR x, y, width, height, rx, ry
.PP
\fB path attributes: \fR d with m, M, l, L, h, H, v, V, c, C, s, S, q, Q, t, T, a, A, z, Z
.PP
\fB style attributes: \fR display with none, visibility, hidden, visible,
fill with nonzero and evenodd, opacity, fill-opacity,
stroke, stroke-width, stroke-dasharray, stroke-dashoffset, stroke-opacity,
stroke-linecap with butt, round and square,
stroke-linejoin with miter, round and bevel, stroke-miterlimit
fill-rule, font-size,
transform with matrix, translate, scale, rotate, skewX and skewY,
stop-color, stop-opacity, offset, id, class
.RE
.
Currently only SVG images reading and conversion into (pixel-based
format) photos is supported: Tk does not (yet) support bundling photo
images in SVG vector graphics.
.VE 8.6
.VS 8.7
.SH "COLOR FORMATS"
.PP
The default image handler can represent/parse color and alpha values
of a pixel in one of the formats listed below. If a color format does
not contain transparency information, full opacity is assumed. The
available color formats are:
.IP \(bu 3
The empty string - interpreted as full transparency, the color value
is undefined.
.IP \(bu 3
Any value accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR, optionally followed by an
alpha suffix. The alpha suffix may be one of:
.RS
.TP
\fB@\fR\fIA\fR
.
The alpha value \fIA\fR must be a fractional value in the range 0.0
(fully transparent) to 1.0 (fully opaque).
.TP
\fB#\fR\fIX\fR
.
The alpha value \fIX\fR is a hexadecimal digit that specifies an integer
alpha value in the range 0 (fully transparent) to 255 (fully opaque).
This is expanded in range from 4 bits wide to 8 bits wide by
multiplication by 0x11.
.TP
\fB#\fR\fIXX\fR
.
The alpha value \fIXX\fR is passed as two hexadecimal digits that
specify an integer alpha value in the range 0 (fully transparent) to 255
(fully opaque).
.RE
.IP \(bu 3
A Tcl list with three or four integers in the range 0 to 255,
specifying the values for the red, green, blue and (optionally)
alpha channels respectively.
.IP \(bu 3
\fB#\fR\fIRGBA\fR format: a \fB#\fR followed by four hexadecimal digits,
where each digit is the value for the red, green, blue and alpha
channels respectively. Each digit will be expanded internally to
8 bits by multiplication by 0x11.
.IP \(bu 3
\fB#\fR\fIRRGGBBAA\fR format: \fB#\fR followed by eight hexadecimal digits,
where each pair of subsequent digits represents the value for the red,
green, blue and alpha channels respectively.
.VE 8.7
.SH "COLOR ALLOCATION"
.PP
When a photo image is displayed in a window, the photo image code
allocates colors to use to display the image and dithers the image, if
necessary, to display a reasonable approximation to the image using
the colors that are available. The colors are allocated as a color
cube, that is, the number of colors allocated is the product of the
|
︙ | | |
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
|
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
|
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
.CS
\fBimage create photo\fR icon \-file "icon.png"
\fBimage create photo\fR iconDisabled \-file "icon.png" \e
\-format "png \-alpha 0.5"
button .b \-image icon \-disabledimage iconDisabled
.CE
.VE 8.6
.PP
.VS 8.7
Create a green box with a simple shadow effect
.PP
.CS
\fBimage create photo\fR foo
# Make a simple graduated fill varying in alpha for the shadow
for {set i 14} {$i > 0} {incr i -1} {
set i2 [expr {$i + 30}]
foo \fBput\fR [format black#%x [expr {15-$i}]] -to $i $i $i2 $i2
}
# Put a solid green rectangle on top
foo \fBput\fR #F080 -to 0 0 30 30
.VE 8.7
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
image(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
photo, image, color
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:
|
Changes to doc/place.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH place n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
place \- Geometry manager for fixed or rubber-sheet placement
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/popup.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH tk_popup n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
tk_popup \- Post a popup menu
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/raise.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH raise n 3.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
raise \- Change a window's position in the stacking order
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/scale.n.
︙ | | |
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
|
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
|
-
+
|
Specifies the desired long dimension of the scale in screen units
(i.e. any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR).
For vertical scales this is the scale's height; for horizontal scales
it is the scale's width.
.OP \-resolution resolution Resolution
A real value specifying the resolution for the scale.
If this value is greater than zero then the scale's value will always be
rounded to an even multiple of this value, as will tick marks and
rounded to an even multiple of this value, as will
the endpoints of the scale. If the value is less than zero then no
rounding occurs. Defaults to 1 (i.e., the value will be integral).
.OP \-showvalue showValue ShowValue
Specifies a boolean value indicating whether or not the current
value of the scale is to be displayed.
.OP \-sliderlength sliderLength SliderLength
Specifies the size of the slider, measured in screen units along the slider's
|
︙ | | |
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
|
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
|
-
+
|
If the scale is disabled then the value may not be changed and the scale
will not activate.
If the scale is active, the slider is displayed using the color
specified by the \fB\-activebackground\fR option.
.OP \-tickinterval tickInterval TickInterval
Must be a real value.
Determines the spacing between numerical
tick marks displayed below or to the left of the slider.
tick marks displayed below or to the left of the slider. The values will all be displayed with the same number of decimal places, which will be enough to ensure they are all accurate to within 20% of a tick interval.
If 0, no tick marks will be displayed.
.OP \-to to To
Specifies a real value corresponding
to the right or bottom end of the scale.
This value may be either less than or greater than the \fB\-from\fR option.
.OP \-variable variable Variable
Specifies the name of a global variable to link to the scale. Whenever the
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/scrollbar.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH scrollbar n 4.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
scrollbar \- Create and manipulate 'scrollbar' scrolling control and indicator widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
|
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
|
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
The widget should adjust its view so that the point given
by \fIfraction\fR appears at the beginning of the widget.
If \fIfraction\fR is 0 it refers to the beginning of the
document. 1.0 refers to the end of the document, 0.333
refers to a point one-third of the way through the document,
and so on.
.TP
\fIprefix \fBscroll \fInumber \fBunits\fR
.
The widget should adjust its view by \fInumber\fR units.
The units are defined in whatever way makes sense for the widget,
such as characters or lines in a text widget.
\fINumber\fR is either 1, which means one unit should scroll off
the top or left of the window, or \-1, which means that one unit
should scroll off the bottom or right of the window.
.TP
\fIprefix \fBscroll \fInumber \fBpages\fR
.
The widget should adjust its view by \fInumber\fR pages.
It is up to the widget to define the meaning of a page; typically
it is slightly less than what fits in the window, so that there
is a slight overlap between the old and new views.
\fINumber\fR is either 1, which means the next page should
become visible, or \-1, which means that the previous page should
become visible.
.TP
\fIprefix \fBscroll \fInumber \fBunits\fR
.
The widget should adjust its view by \fInumber\fR units.
The units are defined in whatever way makes sense for the widget,
such as characters or lines in a text widget.
\fINumber\fR is either 1, which means one unit should scroll off
the top or left of the window, or \-1, which means that one unit
should scroll off the bottom or right of the window.
.SH "OLD COMMAND SYNTAX"
.PP
In versions of Tk before 4.0, the \fBset\fR and \fBget\fR widget
commands used a different form.
This form is still supported for backward compatibility, but it
is deprecated.
In the old command syntax, the \fBset\fR widget command has the
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/send.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH send n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
send \- Execute a command in a different application
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/spinbox.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
|
-
+
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2000 Jeffrey Hobbs.
'\" Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH spinbox n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
spinbox \- Create and manipulate 'spinbox' value spinner widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBspinbox\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-activebackground \-highlightthickness \-repeatinterval
\-background \-insertbackground \-selectbackground
\-borderwidth \-insertborderwidth \-selectborderwidth
\-cursor \-insertontime \-selectforeground
\-exportselection \-insertwidth \-takefocus
\-font \-insertofftime \-textvariable
\-foreground \-justify \-xscrollcommand
\-highlightbackground \-relief
\-highlightcolor \-repeatdelay
\-placeholder \-placeholderforeground
.SE
.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
.OP \-buttonbackground buttonBackground Background
The background color to be used for the spin buttons.
.OP \-buttoncursor buttonCursor Cursor
The cursor to be used when over the spin buttons. If this is empty
(the default), a default cursor will be used.
|
︙ | | |
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
|
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
|
-
+
+
|
when using the \fB\-from\fR and \fB\-to\fR range.
This must be a format specifier of the form \fB%<pad>.<pad>f\fR,
as it will format a floating-point number.
.OP \-from from From
A floating-point value corresponding to the lowest value for a spinbox, to
be used in conjunction with \fB\-to\fR and \fB\-increment\fR. When all
are specified correctly, the spinbox will use these values to control its
contents. This value must be less than the \fB\-to\fR option.
contents. If this value is greater than the \fB\-to\fR option, then
\fB\-from\fR and \fB\-to\fR values are automatically swapped.
If \fB\-values\fR is specified, it supersedes this option.
.OP "\-invalidcommand or \-invcmd" invalidCommand InvalidCommand
Specifies a script to eval when \fB\-validatecommand\fR returns 0. Setting
it to an empty string disables this feature (the default). The best use of
this option is to set it to \fIbell\fR. See \fBVALIDATION\fR below for
more information.
.OP \-increment increment Increment
|
︙ | | |
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
|
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
|
-
+
+
|
displayed, the contents will not be selectable, and the spinbox may
be displayed in a different color, depending on the values of the
\fB\-disabledforeground\fR and \fB\-disabledbackground\fR options.
.OP \-to to To
A floating-point value corresponding to the highest value for the spinbox,
to be used in conjunction with \fB\-from\fR and \fB\-increment\fR. When
all are specified correctly, the spinbox will use these values to control
its contents. This value must be greater than the \fB\-from\fR option.
its contents. If this value is less than the \fB\-from\fR option, then
\fB\-from\fR and \fB\-to\fR values are automatically swapped.
If \fB\-values\fR is specified, it supersedes this option.
.OP \-validate validate Validate
Specifies the mode in which validation should operate: \fBnone\fR,
\fBfocus\fR, \fBfocusin\fR, \fBfocusout\fR, \fBkey\fR, or \fBall\fR.
It defaults to \fBnone\fR. When you want validation, you must explicitly
state which mode you wish to use. See \fBVALIDATION\fR below for more.
.OP "\-validatecommand or \-vcmd" validateCommand ValidateCommand
|
︙ | | |
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
|
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
|
-
+
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
|
way through the text appears at the left edge of the window.
\fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR
This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to
\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR.
\fINumber\fR must be an integer.
\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR or an abbreviation
\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBpages\fR or \fBunits\fR or an abbreviation
of one of these.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by
\fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display; if it is
\fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls.
If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR
screenfuls. If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left
become visible; if it is positive then characters farther to the right
become visible.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by
\fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display.
.RE
.SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS"
.PP
Tk automatically creates class bindings for spinboxes that give them
the following default behavior.
In the descriptions below,
.QW word
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/text.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH text n 8.5 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
text, tk_textCopy, tk_textCut, tk_textPaste \- Create and manipulate 'text' hypertext editing widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310
1311
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
1318
1319
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1328
1329
1330
1331
1332
1333
1334
1335
|
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310
1311
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
1318
1319
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1328
1329
1330
1331
1332
1333
1334
1335
1336
1337
|
-
-
+
+
+
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
|
The insert, delete, edit undo and edit redo commands or the user can set or
clear the modified flag. If \fIboolean\fR is specified, sets the modified flag
of the widget to \fIboolean\fR.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBedit redo\fR
.
When the \fB\-undo\fR option is true, reapplies the last undone edits provided
no other edits were done since then. Generates an error when the redo stack is
empty. Does nothing when the \fB\-undo\fR option is false.
no other edits were done since then, and returns a list of indices indicating
what ranges were changed by the redo operation. Generates an error when the
redo stack is empty. Does nothing when the \fB\-undo\fR option is false.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBedit reset\fR
.
Clears the undo and redo stacks.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBedit separator\fR
.
Inserts a separator (boundary) on the undo stack. Does nothing when the
\fB\-undo\fR option is false.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBedit undo\fR
.
Undoes the last edit action when the \fB\-undo\fR option is true. An edit
action is defined as all the insert and delete commands that are recorded on
the undo stack in between two separators. Generates an error when the undo
Undoes the last edit action when the \fB\-undo\fR option is true, and returns a
list of indices indicating what ranges were changed by the undo operation. An
edit action is defined as all the insert and delete commands that are recorded
on the undo stack in between two separators. Generates an error when the undo
stack is empty. Does nothing when the \fB\-undo\fR option is false.
.RE
.TP
\fIpathName \fBget\fR ?\fB\-displaychars\fR? ?\fB\-\-\fR? \fIindex1\fR ?\fIindex2 ...\fR?
.
Return a range of characters from the text. The return value will be all the
characters in the text starting with the one whose index is \fIindex1\fR and
|
︙ | | |
1924
1925
1926
1927
1928
1929
1930
1931
1932
1933
1934
1935
1936
1937
1938
1939
1940
1941
1942
1943
1944
1945
1946
1947
1948
1949
|
1926
1927
1928
1929
1930
1931
1932
1933
1934
1935
1936
1937
1938
1939
1940
1941
1942
1943
1944
1945
1946
1947
1948
1949
1950
1951
|
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
-
-
+
+
+
+
-
-
|
Adjusts the view in the window so that \fIfraction\fR of the horizontal span
of the text is off-screen to the left. \fIFraction\fR is a fraction between 0
and 1.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR
.
This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to
\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fIWhat\fR must be \fBunits\fR, \fBpages\fR or
\fBpixels\fR. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR then \fInumber\fR
must be an integer, otherwise number may be specified in any of the forms
acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR, such as
\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fIWhat\fR must be \fBpages\fR,
\fBpixels\fR, or \fBunits\fR. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBpages\fR or
\fBunits\fR then \fInumber\fR must be an integer, otherwise number may be
specified in any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR, such as
.QW 2.0c
or
.QW 1i
(the result is rounded to the nearest integer value. If no units are given,
pixels are assumed). If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or
right by \fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display; if it is
pixels are assumed). If \fIwhat\fR is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by
\fInumber\fR screenfuls; if it is \fBpixels\fR then the view adjusts by
\fInumber\fR pixels; if it is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or
right by \fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display. If \fInumber\fR is
\fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls; if it is
\fBpixels\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR pixels. If \fInumber\fR is
negative then characters farther to the left become visible; if it is positive
then characters farther to the right become visible.
.RE
.TP
\fIpathName \fByview \fR?\fIargs\fR?
.
This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the text in
|
︙ | | |
1972
1973
1974
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
|
1974
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
|
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
|
the widget will never scroll beyond the last pixel, and so a value of 1 will
effectively be rounded back to whatever fraction ensures the last pixel is at
the bottom of the window, and some other pixel is at the top.
.TP
\fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR
.
This command adjust the view in the window up or down according to
\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fIWhat\fR must be \fBunits\fR, \fBpages\fR or
\fBpixels\fR. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR then \fInumber\fR
must be an integer, otherwise number may be specified in any of the forms
acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR, such as
\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fIWhat\fR must be \fBpages\fR,
\fBpixels\fR, or \fBunits\fR. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR then
\fInumber\fR must be an integer, otherwise number may be specified in any of
the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR, such as
.QW 2.0c
or
.QW 1i
(the result is rounded to the nearest integer value. If no units are given,
pixels are assumed). If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts up or down
by \fInumber\fR lines on the display; if it is \fBpages\fR then the view
adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls; if it is \fBpixels\fR then the view
|
︙ | | |
2151
2152
2153
2154
2155
2156
2157
2158
2159
2160
2161
2162
2163
2164
2165
2166
2167
2168
2169
|
2153
2154
2155
2156
2157
2158
2159
2160
2161
2162
2163
2164
2165
2166
2167
2168
2169
2170
2171
|
-
-
-
+
+
+
|
.IP [28]
Control-o opens a new line by inserting a newline character in front of the
insertion cursor without moving the insertion cursor.
.IP [29]
Meta-backspace and Meta-Delete delete the word to the left of the insertion
cursor.
.IP [30]
Control-x deletes whatever is selected in the text widget after copying it to
the clipboard.
.IP [31]
Control-t reverses the order of the two characters to the right of the
insertion cursor.
.IP [31]
Control-x deletes whatever is selected in the text widget after copying it to
the clipboard.
.IP [32]
Control-z undoes the last edit action if the \fB\-undo\fR option is true.
Does nothing otherwise.
.IP [33]
Control-Z (or Control-y on Windows) reapplies the last undone edit action if
the \fB\-undo\fR option is true. Does nothing otherwise.
.PP
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/tk.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH tk n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
tk \- Manipulate Tk internal state
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/tk4.0.ps.
︙ | | |
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
|
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
|
-
+
|
% FrameMaker.
% NOTE
% This file fixes the problem with NeWS printers dithering color output.
% Any questions should be sent to [email protected]
%
% Known Problems:
% Due to bugs in Transcript, the 'PS-Adobe-' is omitted from line 1
/FMversion (3.0) def
/FMversion (3.0) def
% Set up Color vs. Black-and-White
/FMPrintInColor { % once-thru loop gimmick
% See if we're a NeWSprint printer
/currentcanvas where {
pop systemdict /separationdict known
exit
|
︙ | | |
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
|
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
|
-
+
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
+
+
+
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
+
-
-
-
+
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
-
+
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
+
-
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
-
+
+
+
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
+
-
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
+
|
% } if
systemdict /colorimage known
systemdict /currentcolortransfer known and
exit } loop def
% Uncomment the following line to force b&w on color printer
% /FMPrintInColor false def
/FrameDict 195 dict def
/FrameDict 195 dict def
systemdict /errordict known not {/errordict 10 dict def
errordict /rangecheck {stop} put} if
% The readline in 23.0 doesn't recognize cr's as nl's on AppleTalk
FrameDict /tmprangecheck errordict /rangecheck get put
errordict /rangecheck {FrameDict /bug true put} put
FrameDict /bug false put
mark
FrameDict /tmprangecheck errordict /rangecheck get put
errordict /rangecheck {FrameDict /bug true put} put
FrameDict /bug false put
mark
% Some PS machines read past the CR, so keep the following 3 lines together!
currentfile 5 string readline
00
0000000000
cleartomark
errordict /rangecheck FrameDict /tmprangecheck get put
FrameDict /bug get {
cleartomark
errordict /rangecheck FrameDict /tmprangecheck get put
FrameDict /bug get {
/readline {
/gstring exch def
/gfile exch def
/gindex 0 def
{
gfile read pop
dup 10 eq {exit} if
dup 13 eq {exit} if
gstring exch gindex exch put
/gindex gindex 1 add def
gfile read pop
dup 10 eq {exit} if
dup 13 eq {exit} if
gstring exch gindex exch put
/gindex gindex 1 add def
} loop
pop
gstring 0 gindex getinterval true
pop
gstring 0 gindex getinterval true
} def
} if
/FMVERSION {
FMversion ne {
/Times-Roman findfont 18 scalefont setfont
100 100 moveto
(FrameMaker version does not match postscript_prolog!)
dup =
show showpage
} if
} def
} def
/FMLOCAL {
FrameDict begin
0 def
end
} def
0 def
end
} def
/gstring FMLOCAL
/gfile FMLOCAL
/gindex FMLOCAL
/orgxfer FMLOCAL
/orgproc FMLOCAL
/organgle FMLOCAL
/orgfreq FMLOCAL
/yscale FMLOCAL
/xscale FMLOCAL
/manualfeed FMLOCAL
/paperheight FMLOCAL
/paperwidth FMLOCAL
/FMDOCUMENT {
array /FMfonts exch def
/FMDOCUMENT {
array /FMfonts exch def
/#copies exch def
FrameDict begin
0 ne dup {setmanualfeed} if
/manualfeed exch def
/paperheight exch def
/paperwidth exch def
/yscale exch def
/xscale exch def
currenttransfer cvlit /orgxfer exch def
currentscreen cvlit /orgproc exch def
/organgle exch def /orgfreq exch def
setpapername
manualfeed {true} {papersize} ifelse
{manualpapersize} {false} ifelse
setpapername
manualfeed {true} {papersize} ifelse
{manualpapersize} {false} ifelse
{desperatepapersize} if
end
} def
end
} def
/pagesave FMLOCAL
/orgmatrix FMLOCAL
/landscape FMLOCAL
/FMBEGINPAGE {
FrameDict begin
/FMBEGINPAGE {
FrameDict begin
/pagesave save def
3.86 setmiterlimit
/landscape exch 0 ne def
landscape {
90 rotate 0 exch neg translate pop
landscape {
90 rotate 0 exch neg translate pop
}
{pop pop}
ifelse
xscale yscale scale
/orgmatrix matrix def
gsave
} def
gsave
} def
/FMENDPAGE {
grestore
grestore
pagesave restore
end
end
showpage
} def
/FMFONTDEFINE {
} def
/FMFONTDEFINE {
FrameDict begin
findfont
ReEncode
1 index exch
definefont
FMfonts 3 1 roll
findfont
ReEncode
1 index exch
definefont
FMfonts 3 1 roll
put
end
} def
end
} def
/FMFILLS {
FrameDict begin
array /fillvals exch def
end
} def
end
} def
/FMFILL {
FrameDict begin
fillvals 3 1 roll put
end
} def
/FMNORMALIZEGRAPHICS {
end
} def
/FMNORMALIZEGRAPHICS {
newpath
0.0 0.0 moveto
1 setlinewidth
0 setlinecap
0 0 0 sethsbcolor
0 setgray
0 setgray
} bind def
/fx FMLOCAL
/fy FMLOCAL
/fh FMLOCAL
/fw FMLOCAL
/llx FMLOCAL
/lly FMLOCAL
/urx FMLOCAL
/ury FMLOCAL
/FMBEGINEPSF {
end
/FMEPSF save def
/showpage {} def
FMNORMALIZEGRAPHICS
[/fy /fx /fh /fw /ury /urx /lly /llx] {exch def} forall
fx fy translate
/FMBEGINEPSF {
end
/FMEPSF save def
/showpage {} def
FMNORMALIZEGRAPHICS
[/fy /fx /fh /fw /ury /urx /lly /llx] {exch def} forall
fx fy translate
rotate
fw urx llx sub div fh ury lly sub div scale
llx neg lly neg translate
fw urx llx sub div fh ury lly sub div scale
llx neg lly neg translate
} bind def
/FMENDEPSF {
FMEPSF restore
FrameDict begin
FrameDict begin
} bind def
FrameDict begin
FrameDict begin
/setmanualfeed {
%%BeginFeature *ManualFeed True
statusdict /manualfeed true put
%%EndFeature
} def
/max {2 copy lt {exch} if pop} bind def
/min {2 copy gt {exch} if pop} bind def
/inch {72 mul} def
/pagedimen {
paperheight sub abs 16 lt exch
/pagedimen {
paperheight sub abs 16 lt exch
paperwidth sub abs 16 lt and
{/papername exch def} {pop} ifelse
} def
/papersizedict FMLOCAL
/setpapername {
/papersizedict 14 dict def
/setpapername {
/papersizedict 14 dict def
papersizedict begin
/papername /unknown def
/papername /unknown def
/Letter 8.5 inch 11.0 inch pagedimen
/LetterSmall 7.68 inch 10.16 inch pagedimen
/Tabloid 11.0 inch 17.0 inch pagedimen
/Ledger 17.0 inch 11.0 inch pagedimen
/Legal 8.5 inch 14.0 inch pagedimen
/Statement 5.5 inch 8.5 inch pagedimen
/Executive 7.5 inch 10.0 inch pagedimen
|
︙ | | |
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
|
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
|
-
-
-
+
+
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
|
/A4 {a4tray a4} def
/A4Small {a4tray a4small} def
/B4 {b4tray b4} def
/B5 {b5tray b5} def
/unknown {unknown} def
papersizedict dup papername known {papername} {/unknown} ifelse get
end
/FMdicttop countdictstack 1 add def
statusdict begin stopped end
countdictstack -1 FMdicttop {pop end} for
/FMdicttop countdictstack 1 add def
statusdict begin stopped end
countdictstack -1 FMdicttop {pop end} for
} def
/manualpapersize {
papersizedict begin
/Letter {letter} def
/LetterSmall {lettersmall} def
/Tabloid {11x17} def
/Ledger {ledger} def
/Legal {legal} def
/Statement {statement} def
/Executive {executive} def
/A3 {a3} def
/A4 {a4} def
/A4Small {a4small} def
/B4 {b4} def
/B5 {b5} def
/unknown {unknown} def
papersizedict dup papername known {papername} {/unknown} ifelse get
end
stopped
stopped
} def
/desperatepapersize {
statusdict /setpageparams known
{
paperwidth paperheight 0 1
paperwidth paperheight 0 1
statusdict begin
{setpageparams} stopped pop
{setpageparams} stopped pop
end
} if
} def
/savematrix {
orgmatrix currentmatrix pop
} bind def
/restorematrix {
|
︙ | | |
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
|
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
|
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
+
|
/fraction /currency /guilsinglleft /guilsinglright /fi /fl /daggerdbl
/periodcentered /quotesinglbase /quotedblbase /perthousand
/Acircumflex /Ecircumflex /Aacute /Edieresis /Egrave /Iacute
/Icircumflex /Idieresis /Igrave /Oacute /Ocircumflex /.notdef /Ograve
/Uacute /Ucircumflex /Ugrave /dotlessi /circumflex /tilde /macron
/breve /dotaccent /ring /cedilla /hungarumlaut /ogonek /caron
] def
/ReEncode {
dup
length
dict begin
/ReEncode {
dup
length
dict begin
{
1 index /FID ne
{def}
{pop pop} ifelse
} forall
0 eq {/Encoding DiacriticEncoding def} if
currentdict
end
1 index /FID ne
{def}
{pop pop} ifelse
} forall
0 eq {/Encoding DiacriticEncoding def} if
currentdict
end
} bind def
/graymode true def
/bwidth FMLOCAL
/bpside FMLOCAL
/bstring FMLOCAL
/onbits FMLOCAL
/offbits FMLOCAL
/xindex FMLOCAL
/yindex FMLOCAL
/x FMLOCAL
/y FMLOCAL
/setpattern {
/bwidth exch def
/bpside exch def
/bstring exch def
/onbits 0 def /offbits 0 def
freq sangle landscape {90 add} if
freq sangle landscape {90 add} if
{/y exch def
/x exch def
/xindex x 1 add 2 div bpside mul cvi def
/yindex y 1 add 2 div bpside mul cvi def
bstring yindex bwidth mul xindex 8 idiv add get
1 7 xindex 8 mod sub bitshift and 0 ne
{/onbits onbits 1 add def 1}
|
︙ | | |
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
|
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
|
-
-
+
+
-
+
-
-
+
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
-
+
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
-
+
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
-
-
+
+
+
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
+
+
+
-
-
-
+
+
+
-
-
-
+
+
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
+
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
-
+
|
orgfreq organgle orgproc cvx setscreen
} if
} bind def
/HUE FMLOCAL
/SAT FMLOCAL
/BRIGHT FMLOCAL
/Colors FMLOCAL
FMPrintInColor
FMPrintInColor
{
/HUE 0 def
/SAT 0 def
/BRIGHT 0 def
% array of arrays Hue and Sat values for the separations [HUE BRIGHT]
/Colors
/Colors
[[0 0 ] % black
[0 0 ] % white
[0.00 1.0] % red
[0.37 1.0] % green
[0.60 1.0] % blue
[0.50 1.0] % cyan
[0.83 1.0] % magenta
[0.16 1.0] % comment / yellow
] def
/BEGINBITMAPCOLOR {
/BEGINBITMAPCOLOR {
BITMAPCOLOR} def
/BEGINBITMAPCOLORc {
/BEGINBITMAPCOLORc {
BITMAPCOLORc} def
/BEGINBITMAPTRUECOLOR {
/BEGINBITMAPTRUECOLOR {
BITMAPTRUECOLOR } def
/BEGINBITMAPTRUECOLORc {
/BEGINBITMAPTRUECOLORc {
BITMAPTRUECOLORc } def
/K {
/K {
Colors exch get dup
0 get /HUE exch store
0 get /HUE exch store
1 get /BRIGHT exch store
HUE 0 eq BRIGHT 0 eq and
{1.0 SAT sub setgray}
{HUE SAT BRIGHT sethsbcolor}
{HUE SAT BRIGHT sethsbcolor}
ifelse
} def
/FMsetgray {
/SAT exch 1.0 exch sub store
/FMsetgray {
/SAT exch 1.0 exch sub store
HUE 0 eq BRIGHT 0 eq and
{1.0 SAT sub setgray}
{HUE SAT BRIGHT sethsbcolor}
{HUE SAT BRIGHT sethsbcolor}
ifelse
} bind def
}
{
/BEGINBITMAPCOLOR {
/BEGINBITMAPCOLOR {
BITMAPGRAY} def
/BEGINBITMAPCOLORc {
/BEGINBITMAPCOLORc {
BITMAPGRAYc} def
/BEGINBITMAPTRUECOLOR {
/BEGINBITMAPTRUECOLOR {
BITMAPTRUEGRAY } def
/BEGINBITMAPTRUECOLORc {
/BEGINBITMAPTRUECOLORc {
BITMAPTRUEGRAYc } def
/FMsetgray {setgray} bind def
/K {
/K {
pop
} def
}
ifelse
/normalize {
transform round exch round exch itransform
} bind def
/dnormalize {
dtransform round exch round exch idtransform
} bind def
/lnormalize {
/lnormalize {
0 dtransform exch cvi 2 idiv 2 mul 1 add exch idtransform pop
} bind def
/H {
/H {
lnormalize setlinewidth
} bind def
/Z {
setlinecap
} bind def
/fillvals FMLOCAL
/X {
/X {
fillvals exch get
dup type /stringtype eq
{8 1 setpattern}
{8 1 setpattern}
{grayness}
ifelse
} bind def
/V {
/V {
gsave eofill grestore
} bind def
/N {
/N {
stroke
} bind def
/M {newpath moveto} bind def
/E {lineto} bind def
/D {curveto} bind def
/O {closepath} bind def
/n FMLOCAL
/L {
/L {
/n exch def
newpath
normalize
moveto
moveto
2 1 n {pop normalize lineto} for
} bind def
/Y {
L
/Y {
L
closepath
} bind def
/x1 FMLOCAL
/x2 FMLOCAL
/y1 FMLOCAL
/y2 FMLOCAL
/rad FMLOCAL
/R {
/R {
/y2 exch def
/x2 exch def
/y1 exch def
/x1 exch def
x1 y1
x2 y1
x2 y2
x1 y2
4 Y
4 Y
} bind def
/RR {
/RR {
/rad exch def
normalize
/y2 exch def
/x2 exch def
normalize
/y1 exch def
/x1 exch def
newpath
x1 y1 rad add moveto
x1 y2 x2 y2 rad arcto
x2 y2 x2 y1 rad arcto
x2 y1 x1 y1 rad arcto
x1 y1 x1 y2 rad arcto
closepath
16 {pop} repeat
} bind def
/C {
/C {
grestore
gsave
R
R
clip
} bind def
/FMpointsize FMLOCAL
/F {
/F {
FMfonts exch get
FMpointsize scalefont
setfont
} bind def
/Q {
/Q {
/FMpointsize exch def
F
F
} bind def
/T {
/T {
moveto show
} bind def
/RF {
/RF {
rotate
0 ne {-1 1 scale} if
} bind def
/TF {
/TF {
gsave
moveto
moveto
RF
show
grestore
} bind def
/P {
/P {
moveto
0 32 3 2 roll widthshow
} bind def
/PF {
/PF {
gsave
moveto
moveto
RF
0 32 3 2 roll widthshow
grestore
} bind def
/S {
/S {
moveto
0 exch ashow
} bind def
/SF {
/SF {
gsave
moveto
RF
0 exch ashow
grestore
} bind def
/B {
/B {
moveto
0 32 4 2 roll 0 exch awidthshow
} bind def
/BF {
/BF {
gsave
moveto
RF
0 32 4 2 roll 0 exch awidthshow
grestore
} bind def
/G {
/G {
gsave
newpath
normalize translate 0.0 0.0 moveto
dnormalize scale
0.0 0.0 1.0 5 3 roll arc
normalize translate 0.0 0.0 moveto
dnormalize scale
0.0 0.0 1.0 5 3 roll arc
closepath fill
grestore
} bind def
/A {
/A {
gsave
savematrix
newpath
2 index 2 div add exch 3 index 2 div sub exch
normalize 2 index 2 div sub exch 3 index 2 div add exch
translate
scale
0.0 0.0 1.0 5 3 roll arc
2 index 2 div add exch 3 index 2 div sub exch
normalize 2 index 2 div sub exch 3 index 2 div add exch
translate
scale
0.0 0.0 1.0 5 3 roll arc
restorematrix
stroke
grestore
} bind def
/x FMLOCAL
/y FMLOCAL
/w FMLOCAL
/h FMLOCAL
/xx FMLOCAL
/yy FMLOCAL
/ww FMLOCAL
/hh FMLOCAL
/FMsaveobject FMLOCAL
/FMoptop FMLOCAL
/FMdicttop FMLOCAL
/BEGINPRINTCODE {
/FMdicttop countdictstack 1 add def
/FMoptop count 4 sub def
/BEGINPRINTCODE {
/FMdicttop countdictstack 1 add def
/FMoptop count 4 sub def
/FMsaveobject save def
userdict begin
/showpage {} def
FMNORMALIZEGRAPHICS
userdict begin
/showpage {} def
FMNORMALIZEGRAPHICS
3 index neg 3 index neg translate
} bind def
/ENDPRINTCODE {
count -1 FMoptop {pop pop} for
countdictstack -1 FMdicttop {pop end} for
FMsaveobject restore
count -1 FMoptop {pop pop} for
countdictstack -1 FMdicttop {pop end} for
FMsaveobject restore
} bind def
/gn {
0
{ 46 mul
cf read pop
32 sub
dup 46 lt {exit} if
46 sub add
/gn {
0
{ 46 mul
cf read pop
32 sub
dup 46 lt {exit} if
46 sub add
} loop
add
add
} bind def
/str FMLOCAL
/cfs {
/str sl string def
0 1 sl 1 sub {str exch val put} for
str def
/cfs {
/str sl string def
0 1 sl 1 sub {str exch val put} for
str def
} bind def
/ic [
/ic [
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0223
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0223
0
{0 hx} {1 hx} {2 hx} {3 hx} {4 hx} {5 hx} {6 hx} {7 hx} {8 hx} {9 hx}
{10 hx} {11 hx} {12 hx} {13 hx} {14 hx} {15 hx} {16 hx} {17 hx} {18 hx}
{19 hx} {gn hx} {0} {1} {2} {3} {4} {5} {6} {7} {8} {9} {10} {11} {12}
{13} {14} {15} {16} {17} {18} {19} {gn} {0 wh} {1 wh} {2 wh} {3 wh}
|
︙ | | |
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
|
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
|
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
+
+
+
-
+
-
-
-
+
+
+
-
+
-
-
-
+
+
+
-
+
-
-
-
+
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
+
|
/val FMLOCAL
/ws FMLOCAL
/im FMLOCAL
/bs FMLOCAL
/cs FMLOCAL
/len FMLOCAL
/pos FMLOCAL
/ms {
/sl exch def
/val 255 def
/ws cfs
/im cfs
/val 0 def
/bs cfs
/cs cfs
/ms {
/sl exch def
/val 255 def
/ws cfs
/im cfs
/val 0 def
/bs cfs
/cs cfs
} bind def
400 ms
/ip {
is
0
cf cs readline pop
{ ic exch get exec
add
} forall
pop
400 ms
/ip {
is
0
cf cs readline pop
{ ic exch get exec
add
} forall
pop
} bind def
/wh {
/len exch def
/pos exch def
/wh {
/len exch def
/pos exch def
ws 0 len getinterval im pos len getinterval copy pop
pos len
pos len
} bind def
/bl {
/len exch def
/pos exch def
/bl {
/len exch def
/pos exch def
bs 0 len getinterval im pos len getinterval copy pop
pos len
pos len
} bind def
/s1 1 string def
/fl {
/len exch def
/pos exch def
/fl {
/len exch def
/pos exch def
/val cf s1 readhexstring pop 0 get def
pos 1 pos len add 1 sub {im exch val put} for
pos len
pos len
} bind def
/hx {
3 copy getinterval
cf exch readhexstring pop pop
/hx {
3 copy getinterval
cf exch readhexstring pop pop
} bind def
/h FMLOCAL
/w FMLOCAL
/d FMLOCAL
/lb FMLOCAL
/bitmapsave FMLOCAL
/is FMLOCAL
/cf FMLOCAL
/wbytes {
dup
/wbytes {
dup
8 eq {pop} {1 eq {7 add 8 idiv} {3 add 4 idiv} ifelse} ifelse
} bind def
/BEGINBITMAPBWc {
/BEGINBITMAPBWc {
1 {} COMMONBITMAPc
} bind def
/BEGINBITMAPGRAYc {
/BEGINBITMAPGRAYc {
8 {} COMMONBITMAPc
} bind def
/BEGINBITMAP2BITc {
/BEGINBITMAP2BITc {
2 {} COMMONBITMAPc
} bind def
/COMMONBITMAPc {
/COMMONBITMAPc {
/r exch def
/d exch def
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/lb w d wbytes def
sl lb lt {lb ms} if
/bitmapsave save def
r
/is im 0 lb getinterval def
ws 0 lb getinterval is copy pop
/cf currentfile def
w h d [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{ip} image
bitmapsave restore
/lb w d wbytes def
sl lb lt {lb ms} if
/bitmapsave save def
r
/is im 0 lb getinterval def
ws 0 lb getinterval is copy pop
/cf currentfile def
w h d [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{ip} image
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/BEGINBITMAPBW {
/BEGINBITMAPBW {
1 {} COMMONBITMAP
} bind def
/BEGINBITMAPGRAY {
/BEGINBITMAPGRAY {
8 {} COMMONBITMAP
} bind def
/BEGINBITMAP2BIT {
/BEGINBITMAP2BIT {
2 {} COMMONBITMAP
} bind def
/COMMONBITMAP {
/COMMONBITMAP {
/r exch def
/d exch def
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/bitmapsave save def
r
/bitmapsave save def
r
/is w d wbytes string def
/cf currentfile def
w h d [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
/cf currentfile def
w h d [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{cf is readhexstring pop} image
bitmapsave restore
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/proc1 FMLOCAL
/proc2 FMLOCAL
/newproc FMLOCAL
/Fmcc {
/proc2 exch cvlit def
|
︙ | | |
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
|
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
|
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
-
+
-
-
-
+
+
+
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
-
+
-
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
|
setcolortransfer
{pop 0} setundercolorremoval
{} setblackgeneration
} bind def
/tran FMLOCAL
/fakecolorsetup {
/tran 256 string def
0 1 255 {/indx exch def
0 1 255 {/indx exch def
tran indx
red indx get 77 mul
green indx get 151 mul
blue indx get 28 mul
add add 256 idiv put} for
currenttransfer
{255 mul cvi tran exch get 255.0 div}
exch Fmcc settransfer
} bind def
/BITMAPCOLOR {
/BITMAPCOLOR {
/d 8 def
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/bitmapsave save def
/bitmapsave save def
colorsetup
/is w d wbytes string def
/cf currentfile def
w h d [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{cf is readhexstring pop} {is} {is} true 3 colorimage
bitmapsave restore
/cf currentfile def
w h d [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{cf is readhexstring pop} {is} {is} true 3 colorimage
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/BITMAPCOLORc {
/BITMAPCOLORc {
/d 8 def
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/lb w d wbytes def
sl lb lt {lb ms} if
/bitmapsave save def
/lb w d wbytes def
sl lb lt {lb ms} if
/bitmapsave save def
colorsetup
/is im 0 lb getinterval def
ws 0 lb getinterval is copy pop
/cf currentfile def
w h d [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
/is im 0 lb getinterval def
ws 0 lb getinterval is copy pop
/cf currentfile def
w h d [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{ip} {is} {is} true 3 colorimage
bitmapsave restore
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/BITMAPTRUECOLORc {
/BITMAPTRUECOLORc {
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/bitmapsave save def
/bitmapsave save def
/is w string def
ws 0 w getinterval is copy pop
/cf currentfile def
w h 8 [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
ws 0 w getinterval is copy pop
/cf currentfile def
w h 8 [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{ip} {gip} {bip} true 3 colorimage
bitmapsave restore
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/BITMAPTRUECOLOR {
/BITMAPTRUECOLOR {
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/bitmapsave save def
/bitmapsave save def
/is w string def
/gis w string def
/bis w string def
/cf currentfile def
w h 8 [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{ cf is readhexstring pop }
{ cf gis readhexstring pop }
{ cf bis readhexstring pop }
true 3 colorimage
bitmapsave restore
/cf currentfile def
w h 8 [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{ cf is readhexstring pop }
{ cf gis readhexstring pop }
{ cf bis readhexstring pop }
true 3 colorimage
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/BITMAPTRUEGRAYc {
/BITMAPTRUEGRAYc {
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/bitmapsave save def
/bitmapsave save def
/is w string def
ws 0 w getinterval is copy pop
/cf currentfile def
w h 8 [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
ws 0 w getinterval is copy pop
/cf currentfile def
w h 8 [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{ip gip bip w gray} image
bitmapsave restore
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/ww FMLOCAL
/r FMLOCAL
/g FMLOCAL
/b FMLOCAL
/i FMLOCAL
/gray {
/gray {
/ww exch def
/b exch def
/g exch def
/r exch def
0 1 ww 1 sub { /i exch def r i get .299 mul g i get .587 mul
b i get .114 mul add add r i 3 -1 roll floor cvi put } for
r
} bind def
/BITMAPTRUEGRAY {
/BITMAPTRUEGRAY {
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/bitmapsave save def
/bitmapsave save def
/is w string def
/gis w string def
/bis w string def
/cf currentfile def
w h 8 [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{ cf is readhexstring pop
cf gis readhexstring pop
/cf currentfile def
w h 8 [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{ cf is readhexstring pop
cf gis readhexstring pop
cf bis readhexstring pop w gray} image
bitmapsave restore
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/BITMAPGRAY {
/BITMAPGRAY {
8 {fakecolorsetup} COMMONBITMAP
} bind def
/BITMAPGRAYc {
/BITMAPGRAYc {
8 {fakecolorsetup} COMMONBITMAPc
} bind def
/ENDBITMAP {
} bind def
end
end
/ALDsave FMLOCAL
/ALDmatrix matrix def ALDmatrix currentmatrix pop
/StartALD {
/ALDsave save def
savematrix
ALDmatrix setmatrix
} bind def
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/tk_mac.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
|
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2011 Kevin Walzer.
'\" Copyright (c) 2011 Donal K. Fellows.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH tk::mac n 8.6 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
tk::mac \- Access Mac-Specific Functionality on OS X from Tk
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB::tk::mac::DoScriptFile\fR
\fB::tk::mac::DoScriptText\fR
\fB::tk::mac::ShowPreferences\fR
\fB::tk::mac::OpenApplication\fR
\fB::tk::mac::ReopenApplication\fR
\fB::tk::mac::OpenDocument \fIfile...\fR
\fB::tk::mac::PrintDocument \fIfile...\fR
\fB::tk::mac::Quit\fR
\fB::tk::mac::OnHide\fR
\fB::tk::mac::OnShow\fR
\fB::tk::mac::ShowHelp\fR
\fB::tk::mac::PerformService\fR
\fB::tk::mac::LaunchURL \fIURL...\fR
\fB::tk::mac::GetAppPath\fR
\fB::tk::mac::standardAboutPanel\fR
\fB::tk::mac::useCompatibilityMetrics \fIboolean\fR
\fB::tk::mac::CGAntialiasLimit \fIlimit\fR
\fB::tk::mac::antialiasedtext \fInumber\fR
\fB::tk::mac::useThemedToplevel \fIboolean\fR
\fB::tk::mac::iconBitmap \fIname width height \-kind value\fR
.fi
.BE
.SH "EVENT HANDLER CALLBACKS"
.PP
The Aqua/Mac OS X application environment defines a number of additional
events that applications should respond to. These events are mapped by Tk to
calls to commands in the \fB::tk::mac\fR namespace; unless otherwise noted, if
the command is absent, no action will be taken.
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::DoScriptFile\fR
.
The default Apple Event handler for AEDoScriptHandler. This command,
if defined, executes a Tcl file when an AppleScript sends a
.QW "do script"
command to Wish with a file path as a parameter.
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::DoScriptText\fR
.
The default Apple Event handler for AEDoScriptHandler. This command,
if defined, executes Tcl code when an AppleScript sends a
.QW "do script"
command to Wish with Tcl code or a Tcl procedure as a parameter.
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::ShowPreferences\fR
.
The default Apple Event handler for kAEShowPreferences,
.QW pref .
The application menu
.QW "Preferences"
menu item is only enabled when this proc is defined. Typically this command is
|
︙ | | |
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
|
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
|
-
+
|
}
.CE
.RE
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::OpenApplication\fR
.
If a proc of this name is defined, this proc fill fire when your application
is intially opened. It is the default Apple Event handler for
is initially opened. It is the default Apple Event handler for
kAEOpenApplication,
.QW oapp .
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::ReopenApplication\fR
.
If a proc of this name is defined it is the default Apple Event handler for
kAEReopenApplication,
|
︙ | | |
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
|
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
|
-
-
+
+
-
|
.RE
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::PrintDocument \fIfile...\fR
.
If a proc of this name is defined it is the default Apple Event handler for
kAEPrintDocuments,
.QW pdoc ,
the Apple Event sent when your application is asked to print one or more
documents (e.g., via the Print menu item in the Finder). It works the same
the Apple Event sent when your application is asked to print a
document. It takes a single absolute file path as an argument.
way as \fBtk::mac::OpenDocument\fR in terms of arguments.
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::Quit\fR
.
If a proc of this name is defined it is the default Apple Event handler for
kAEQuitApplication,
.QW quit ,
the Apple Event sent when your application is asked to be quit, e.g. via the
|
︙ | | |
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
|
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
|
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::ShowHelp\fR
.
Customizes behavior of Apple Help menu; if this procedure is not defined, the
platform-specific standard Help menu item
.QW "YourApp Help"
performs the default Cocoa action of showing the Help Book configured in the
application's Info.plist (or displaying an alert if no Help Book is set).
application's Info.plist (or displaying an alert if no Help Book is
set).
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::PerformService\fR
.
Executes a Tcl procedure called from the macOS
.QW Services
menu in the Application menu item. The
.QW Services
menu item allows for inter-application communication; data from one
application, such as selected text, can be sent to another application
for processing, for example to Safari as a search item for Google, or
to TextEdit to be appended to a file. An example of the proc is below,
and should be rewritten in an application script for customization:
.RS
.PP
.CS
proc ::tk::mac::PerformService {} {
set data [clipboard get]
$w insert end $data
}
.CE
.RE
Note that the mechanism for retrieving the data is from the clipboard;
there is no other supported way to obtain the data. If the Services
process is not desired, the NSServices keys can be deleted from
the application's Info.plist file. The underlying code supporting this
command also allows the text, entry and ttk::entry widgets to access
services from other applications via the Services menu. The NSPortName
key in Wish's Info.plist file is currently set as
.QW "Wish"
; if a developer changes the name of the Wish executable to something
else, this key should be modified with the same name.
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::LaunchURL \fIURL...\fR
.
If defined, launches a URL within Tk. This would be used if a Tk
application wants to handle a URL itself, such as displaying data from
an RSS feed, rather than launching a default application to handle the
URL, although it can defined as such. Wish includes a stub URL scheme
of
.QW foo://
in the CFBundleURLSchemes key of its Info.plist file; this should be customized for the specific URL
scheme the developer wants to support.
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::GetAppPath\fR
.
Returns the current applications's file path.
.TP
.SH "ADDITIONAL DIALOGS"
.PP
The Aqua/Mac OS X defines additional dialogs that applications should
support.
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::standardAboutPanel\fR
.
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/tkvars.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH tkvars n 4.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
geometry, tk_library, tk_patchLevel, tk_strictMotif, tk_version \- Variables used or set by Tk
.BE
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/tkwait.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH tkwait n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
tkwait \- Wait for variable to change or window to be destroyed
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/toplevel.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
|
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH toplevel n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
toplevel \- Create and manipulate 'toplevel' main and popup window widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBtoplevel\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-borderwidth \-highlightcolor \-pady
\-cursor \-highlightthickness \-relief
\-highlightbackground \-padx \-takefocus
.SE
.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
.OP \-background background Background
This option is the same as the standard \fB\-background\fR option
except that its value may also be specified as an empty string.
In this case, the widget will display no background or border, and
no colors will be consumed from its colormap for its background
and border.
.VS "8.7, TIP262"
An empty background will disable drawing the background image.
.OP \-backgroundimage backgroundImage BackgroundImage
This specifies an image to display on the toplevel's background within
the border of the toplevel (i.e., the image will be clipped by the
toplevel's highlight ring and border, if either are present) on top of
the background;
subwidgets of the toplevel will be drawn on top. The image must have
been created with the \fBimage create\fR command. If specified as the
empty string, no image will be displayed.
.VE "8.7, TIP262"
.OP \-class class Class
Specifies a class for the window.
This class will be used when querying the option database for
the window's other options, and it will also be used later for
other purposes such as bindings.
The \fB\-class\fR option may not be changed with the \fBconfigure\fR
widget command.
|
︙ | | |
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
|
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
|
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
Specifies the screen on which to place the new window.
Any valid screen name may be used, even one associated with a
different display.
Defaults to the same screen as its parent.
This option is special in that it may not be specified via the option
database, and it may not be modified with the \fBconfigure\fR
widget command.
.OP \-tile tile Tile
.VS "8.7, TIP262"
This specifies how to draw the background image (see
\fB\-backgroundimage\fR) on the toplevel.
If true (according to \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR), the image will be tiled
to fill the whole toplevel, with the origin of the first copy of the
image being the top left of the interior of the toplevel.
If false (the default), the image will be centered within the toplevel.
.VE "8.7, TIP262"
.OP \-use use Use
This option is used for embedding. If the value is not an empty string,
it must be the window identifier of a container window, specified as
a hexadecimal string like the ones returned by the \fBwinfo id\fR
command. The toplevel widget will be created as a child of the given
container instead of the root window for the screen. If the container
window is in a Tk application, it must be a frame or toplevel widget for
|
︙ | | |
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
|
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
|
-
+
-
+
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
+
|
by the \fIpathName\fR argument). Additional
options, described above, may be specified on the command line
or in the option database
to configure aspects of the toplevel such as its background color
and relief. The \fBtoplevel\fR command returns the
path name of the new window.
.PP
A toplevel is similar to a frame except that it is created as a
A toplevel is similar to a \fBframe\fR except that it is created as a
top-level window: its X parent is the root window of a screen
rather than the logical parent from its path name. The primary
rather than the logical parent from its Tk path name. The primary
purpose of a toplevel is to serve as a container for dialog boxes
and other collections of widgets. The only visible features
of a toplevel are its background color and an optional 3-D border
of a toplevel are its background and an optional 3-D border
to make the toplevel appear raised or sunken.
.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
.PP
The \fBtoplevel\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
name is the same as the path name of the toplevel's window. This
command may be used to invoke various
operations on the widget. It has the following general form:
.PP
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
.CE
.PP
\fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as
the toplevel widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command. The following
commands are possible for toplevel widgets:
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBtoplevel\fR
command.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBtoplevel\fR
command.
.SH BINDINGS
.PP
When a new toplevel is created, it has no default event bindings:
toplevels are not intended to be interactive.
.PP
Be aware that bindings on toplevels may receive events from subwidgets.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
frame(n)
bind(n), bindtags(n), frame(n), wm(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
toplevel, widget
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:
|
Changes to doc/ttk_Theme.3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2003 Joe English
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH Ttk_CreateTheme 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Ttk_CreateTheme, Ttk_GetTheme, Ttk_GetDefaultTheme, Ttk_GetCurrentTheme \- create and use Tk themes.
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/ttk_button.n.
︙ | | |
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
|
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
|
-
+
|
\fBttk::button\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
A \fBttk::button\fR widget displays a textual label and/or image,
and evaluates a command when pressed.
.SO ttk_widget
\-class \-compound \-cursor
\-image \-state \-style
\-image \-justify \-state \-style
\-takefocus \-text \-textvariable
\-underline \-width
.SE
.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
.OP \-command command Command
A script to evaluate when the widget is invoked.
.OP \-default default Default
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/ttk_combobox.n.
︙ | | |
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
|
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
|
-
+
|
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
A \fBttk::combobox\fR combines a text field with a pop-down list of values;
the user may select the value of the text field from among the
values in the list.
.SO ttk_widget
\-class \-cursor \-takefocus
\-style
\-style \-placeholder
.SE
.\" ALSO: Other entry widget options
.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
.OP \-exportselection exportSelection ExportSelection
Boolean value.
If set, the widget selection is linked to the X selection.
.OP \-justify justify Justify
|
︙ | | |
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
|
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
|
-
+
+
+
|
'\".TP
'\"\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
'\"Modify or query widget options.
'\"See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcurrent\fR ?\fInewIndex\fR?
If \fInewIndex\fR is supplied, sets the combobox value
to the element at position \fInewIndex\fR in the list of \fB\-values\fR.
to the element at position \fInewIndex\fR in the list of \fB\-values\fR
(in addition to integers, the \fBend\fR index is supported and indicates
the last element of the list).
Otherwise, returns the index of the current value in the list of
\fB\-values\fR or \fB\-1\fR if the current value does not appear in the list.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBget\fR
Returns the current value of the combobox.
'\".TP
'\"\fIpathName \fBidentify \fIx y\fR
|
︙ | | |
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
|
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
|
+
+
|
.PP
Dynamic states: \fBdisabled\fP, \fBfocus\fP, \fBpressed\fP, \fBreadonly\fP.
.PP
\fBTCombobox\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP
are:
.PP
\fB\-arrowcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
\fB\-arrowsize\fP \fIamount\fP
.br
\fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
\fB\-bordercolor\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
\fB\-darkcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/ttk_entry.n.
︙ | | |
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
|
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
|
-
-
+
+
+
+
-
-
|
An \fBttk::entry\fR widget displays a one-line text string and
allows that string to be edited by the user.
The value of the string may be linked to a Tcl variable
with the \fB\-textvariable\fR option.
Entry widgets support horizontal scrolling with the
standard \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR option and \fBxview\fR widget command.
.SO ttk_widget
\-class \-cursor \-style
\-takefocus \-xscrollcommand
\-class \-cursor
\-font \-foreground
\-style
\-takefocus \-xscrollcommand \-placeholder
.SE
.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
.OP \-exportselection exportSelection ExportSelection
A boolean value specifying whether or not
a selection in the widget should be linked to the X selection.
If the selection is exported, then selecting in the widget deselects
the current X selection, selecting outside the widget deselects any
widget selection, and the widget will respond to selection retrieval
requests when it has a selection.
.\" MAYBE: .OP \-font font Font
.\" MAYBE: .OP \-foreground foreground Foreground
.\" MAYBE: .OP \-insertbackground insertBackground Foreground
.\" MAYBE: .OP \-insertwidth insertWidth InsertWidth
.OP \-invalidcommand invalidCommand InvalidCommand
A script template to evaluate whenever the \fB\-validatecommand\fR returns 0.
See \fBVALIDATION\fR below for more information.
.OP \-justify justify Justify
Specifies how the text is aligned within the entry widget.
|
︙ | | |
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
|
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
|
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
|
.TP
\fIpathName \fBvalidate\fR
Force revalidation, independent of the conditions specified
by the \fB\-validate\fR option.
Returns 0 if validation fails, 1 if it succeeds.
Sets or clears the \fBinvalid\fR state accordingly.
See \fBVALIDATION\fR below for more details.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview \fIargs\fR
This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the
text in the widget's window. It can take any of the following
forms:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview\fR
Returns a list containing two elements.
Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1; together they describe
the horizontal span that is visible in the window.
For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6,
20% of the entry's text is off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible
in the window, and 40% of the text is off-screen to the right.
These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR
option.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview\fR \fIindex\fR
Adjusts the view in the window so that the character given by \fIindex\fR
is displayed at the left edge of the window.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview moveto\fI fraction\fR
Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the
way through the text appears at the left edge of the window.
\fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR
This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to
\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR.
\fINumber\fR must be an integer.
\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR.
'\" or an abbreviation of one of these, but we don't document that.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by
\fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display; if it is
\fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls.
If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left
become visible; if it is positive then characters farther to the right
become visible.
.RE
.PP
The entry widget also supports the following generic \fBttk::widget\fR
widget subcommands (see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR for details):
.DS
.ta 5.5c 11c
\fBcget\fR \fBconfigure\fR \fBidentify\fR
\fBinstate\fR \fBstate\fR
\fBinstate\fR \fBstate\fR \fBxview\fR
.DE
.SH VALIDATION
.PP
The \fB\-validate\fR, \fB\-validatecommand\fR, and \fB\-invalidcommand\fR
options are used to enable entry widget validation.
.SS "VALIDATION MODES"
.PP
|
︙ | | |
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
|
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
|
-
+
+
+
-
-
|
Dynamic states: \fBdisabled\fP, \fBfocus\fP, \fBreadonly\fP.
.PP
\fBTEntry\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP
are:
.PP
\fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP
.RS
When using the aqua theme (Mac OS X), changes the \fB\-fieldbackground\fP.
For backwards compatibility, when using the aqua theme (for macOS), this
option behaves as an alias for the \fB\-fieldbackground\fP provided that no
value is specified for \fB\-fieldbackground\fP. Otherwise it is ignored.
.RE
\fB\-bordercolor\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
\fB\-darkcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
\fB\-fieldbackground\fP \fIcolor\fP
.RS
Does not work with the aqua theme (Mac OS X).
.br
Some themes use a graphical background and their field background colors cannot be changed.
.RE
\fB\-foreground\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
\fB\-insertwidth\fP \fIamount\fP
.br
\fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/ttk_frame.n.
︙ | | |
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
|
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
|
+
+
+
+
|
.PP
\fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP
.PP
Some options are only available for specific themes.
.PP
See the \fBttk::style\fP manual page for information on how to configure
ttk styles.
.SH BINDINGS
.PP
When a new \fBttk::frame\fR is created, it has no default event bindings;
\fBttk::frame\fRs are not intended to be interactive.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
ttk::widget(n), ttk::labelframe(n), frame(n)
.SH "KEYWORDS"
widget, frame, container
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:
|
Changes to doc/ttk_label.n.
︙ | | |
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
|
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
|
-
-
+
+
+
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
|
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
A \fBttk::label\fR widget displays a textual label and/or image.
The label may be linked to a Tcl variable
to automatically change the displayed text.
.SO ttk_widget
\-class \-compound \-cursor
\-image \-padding \-state \-style \-takefocus
\-anchor \-class \-compound \-cursor
\-font \-foreground
\-image \-justify \-padding \-state \-style \-takefocus
\-text \-textvariable \-underline
\-width
\-width \-wraplength
.SE
.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
.OP \-anchor anchor Anchor
Specifies how the information in the widget is positioned
relative to the inner margins. Legal values are
\fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBe\fR, \fBse\fR,
\fBs\fR, \fBsw\fR, \fBw\fR, \fBnw\fR, and \fBcenter\fR.
See also \fB\-justify\fR.
.OP \-background frameColor FrameColor
The widget's background color.
If unspecified, the theme default is used.
.OP \-font font Font
Font to use for label text.
.OP \-foreground textColor TextColor
The widget's foreground color.
If unspecified, the theme default is used.
.OP \-justify justify Justify
If there are multiple lines of text, specifies how
the lines are laid out relative to one another.
One of \fBleft\fR, \fBcenter\fR, or \fBright\fR.
See also \fB\-anchor\fR.
.OP \-relief relief Relief
.\" Rewrite this:
Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the widget border.
Valid values are
\fBflat\fR, \fBgroove\fR, \fBraised\fR, \fBridge\fR, \fBsolid\fR,
and \fBsunken\fR.
.OP \-wraplength wrapLength WrapLength
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/ttk_progressbar.n.
︙ | | |
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
|
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
|
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
+
+
+
-
+
+
|
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
A \fBttk::progressbar\fR widget shows the status of a long-running
operation. They can operate in two modes: \fIdeterminate\fR mode shows the
amount completed relative to the total amount of work to be done, and
\fIindeterminate\fR mode provides an animated display to let the user know
that something is happening.
.PP
If the value of \fB-orient\fR is \fBhorizontal\fR a text string can be
displayed inside the progressbar. This string can be configured using
the \fB-anchor\fR, \fB-font\fR, \fB-foreground\fR, \fB-justify\fR,
\fB-text\fR and \fB-wraplength\fR options. If the value of \fB-orient\fR
is \fBvertical\fR then these options are ignored.
.SO ttk_widget
\-class \-cursor \-takefocus
\-style
\-anchor \-class \-cursor
\-font \-foreground \-justify \-style
\-takefocus \-text \-wraplength
.SE
.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
.OP \-length length Length
Specifies the length of the long axis of the progress bar
(width if horizontal, height if vertical).
(width if horizontal, height if vertical). The value may have any of the forms
acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
.OP \-maximum maximum Maximum
A floating point number specifying the maximum \fB\-value\fR.
Defaults to 100.
.OP \-mode mode Mode
One of \fBdeterminate\fR or \fBindeterminate\fR.
.OP \-orient orient Orient
One of \fBhorizontal\fR or \fBvertical\fR.
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/ttk_scale.n.
︙ | | |
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
|
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
|
-
+
|
\fIpathName \fBcoords \fR?\fIvalue\fR?
.
Get the coordinates corresponding to \fIvalue\fR, or the coordinates
corresponding to the current value of the \fB\-value\fR option if \fIvalue\fR
is omitted.
.SH "STYLING OPTIONS"
.PP
The class name for a \fBttk::scale\fP is \fBTProgressbar\fP.
The class name for a \fBttk::scale\fP is \fBTScale\fP.
.PP
Dynamic states: \fBactive\fP.
.PP
\fBTProgressbar\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP
are:
.PP
\fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/ttk_scrollbar.n.
︙ | | |
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
|
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
|
-
+
|
\fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR are real fractions between 0 and 1.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBstate\fR ?\fIstateSpec\fR?
Modify or query the widget state; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
.SH "INTERNAL COMMANDS"
.PP
The following widget commands are used internally
by the TScrollbar widget class bindings.
by the \fBTScrollbar\fP widget class bindings.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBdelta \fIdeltaX deltaY\fR
Returns a real number indicating the fractional change in
the scrollbar setting that corresponds to a given change
in thumb position. For example, if the scrollbar is horizontal,
the result indicates how much the scrollbar setting must change
to move the thumb \fIdeltaX\fR pixels to the right (\fIdeltaY\fR is
|
︙ | | |
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
|
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
|
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
-
+
+
+
-
+
|
The widget should adjust its view so that the point given
by \fIfraction\fR appears at the beginning of the widget.
If \fIfraction\fR is 0 it refers to the beginning of the
document. 1.0 refers to the end of the document, 0.333
refers to a point one-third of the way through the document,
and so on.
.TP
\fIprefix \fBscroll \fInumber \fBunits\fR
The widget should adjust its view by \fInumber\fR units.
The units are defined in whatever way makes sense for the widget,
such as characters or lines in a text widget.
\fINumber\fR is either 1, which means one unit should scroll off
the top or left of the window, or \-1, which means that one unit
should scroll off the bottom or right of the window.
.TP
\fIprefix \fBscroll \fInumber \fBpages\fR
The widget should adjust its view by \fInumber\fR pages.
It is up to the widget to define the meaning of a page; typically
it is slightly less than what fits in the window, so that there
is a slight overlap between the old and new views.
\fINumber\fR is either 1, which means the next page should
become visible, or \-1, which means that the previous page should
become visible.
.TP
\fIprefix \fBscroll \fInumber \fBunits\fR
The widget should adjust its view by \fInumber\fR units.
The units are defined in whatever way makes sense for the widget,
such as characters or lines in a text widget.
\fINumber\fR is either 1, which means one unit should scroll off
the top or left of the window, or \-1, which means that one unit
should scroll off the bottom or right of the window.
.SH "WIDGET STATES"
.PP
The scrollbar automatically sets the \fBdisabled\fR state bit.
when the entire range is visible (range is 0.0 to 1.0),
and clears it otherwise.
It also sets the \fBactive\fR and \fBpressed\fR state flags
of individual elements, based on the position and state of the mouse pointer.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
.CS
set f [frame .f]
ttk::scrollbar $f.hsb \-orient horizontal \-command [list $f.t xview]
ttk::scrollbar $f.vsb \-orient vertical \-command [list $f.t yview]
text $f.t \-xscrollcommand [list $f.hsb set] \-yscrollcommand [list $f.vsb set]
grid $f.t \-row 0 \-column 0 \-sticky nsew
grid $f.vsb \-row 0 \-column 1 \-sticky nsew
grid $f.hsb \-row 1 \-column 0 \-sticky nsew
grid columnconfigure $f 0 \-weight 1
grid rowconfigure $f 0 \-weight 1
pack $f
.CE
.SH "STYLING OPTIONS"
.PP
The class name for a \fBttk::scrollbar\fP is \fBTScrollbar\fP.
.PP
Dynamic states: \fBactive\fP, \fBdisabled\fP.
.PP
\fBTScrollbar\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP
are:
\fBTScrollbar\fP (or more specifically \fBVertical.TScrollbar\fP and
\fBHorizontal.TScrollbar\fP) styling options that are configurable with
\fBttk::style\fP are:
.PP
\fB\-arrowcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
\fB\-arrowsize\fP \fIamount\fP
.br
\fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
\fB\-bordercolor\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
\fB\-darkcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP
\fB\-darkcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP (color of the dark part of the 3D relief)
.br
\fB\-foreground\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
\fB\-gripcount\fP \fIcount\fP (number of lines on the thumb)
.br
\fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP
\fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP (color of the light part of the 3D relief)
.br
\fB\-troughcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP
.PP
Some options are only available for specific themes.
.PP
See the \fBttk::style\fP manual page for information on how to configure
ttk styles.
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/ttk_spinbox.n.
︙ | | |
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
|
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
|
-
+
|
up and down buttons that are used to either modify a numeric value or
to select among a set of values. The widget implements all the features
of the \fBttk::entry\fR widget including support of the
\fB\-textvariable\fR option to link the value displayed by the widget
to a Tcl variable.
.SO ttk_widget
\-class \-cursor \-state \-style
\-takefocus \-xscrollcommand
\-takefocus \-xscrollcommand \-placeholder
.SE
.SO ttk_entry
\-validate \-validatecommand
.SE
.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
.OP \-command command Command
Specifies a Tcl command to be invoked whenever a spinbutton is invoked.
|
︙ | | |
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
|
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
|
-
+
+
+
-
+
-
-
|
.PP
\fB\-arrowcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
\fB\-arrowsize\fP \fIamount\fP
.br
\fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP
.RS
When using the aqua theme (Mac OS X), changes the \fB\-fieldbackground\fP.
For backwards compatibility, when using the aqua theme (for macOS), this
option behaves as an alias for the \fB\-fieldbackground\fP provided that no
value is specified for \fB\-fieldbackground\fP. Otherwise it is ignored.
.RE
\fB\-bordercolor\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
\fB\-darkcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
\fB\-fieldbackground\fP \fIcolor\fP
.RS
.br
Does not work with the aqua theme (Mac OS X).
.RE
\fB\-foreground\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
\fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
\fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP
.br
\fB\-selectbackground\fP \fIcolor\fP
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/ttk_treeview.n.
︙ | | |
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
|
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
|
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
|
.RS
.TP
\fB\-id \fIname\fR
The column name. This is a read-only option.
For example, [\fI$pathname \fBcolumn #\fIn \fB\-id\fR]
returns the data column associated with display column #\fIn\fR.
.TP
\fB\-anchor\fR
\fB\-anchor \fIanchor\fR
Specifies how the text in this column should be aligned
with respect to the cell. One of
with respect to the cell. \fIAnchor\fR is one of
\fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBe\fR, \fBse\fR,
\fBs\fR, \fBsw\fR, \fBw\fR, \fBnw\fR, or \fBcenter\fR.
.TP
\fB\-minwidth\fR
\fB\-minwidth \fIminwidth\fR
The minimum width of the column in pixels.
The treeview widget will not make the column any smaller than
\fB\-minwidth\fR when the widget is resized or the user drags a
column separator.
column separator. Default is 20 pixels.
.TP
\fB\-stretch\fR
Specifies whether or not the column's width should be adjusted
when the widget is resized.
\fB\-stretch \fIboolean\fR
Specifies whether or not the column width should be adjusted
when the widget is resized or the user drags a column separator.
\fIBoolean\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR.
By default columns are stretchable.
.TP
\fB\-width \fIw\fR
The width of the column in pixels. Default is something reasonable,
probably 200 or so.
\fB\-width \fIwidth\fR
The width of the column in pixels. Default is 200 pixels. The specified
column width may be changed by Tk in order to honor \fB\-stretch\fR
and/or \fB\-minwidth\fR, or when the widget is resized or the user drags a
column separator.
.PP
Use \fIpathname column #0\fR to configure the tree column.
.RE
.TP
\fIpathname \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
Modify or query widget options; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
.TP
|
︙ | | |
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
|
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
|
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
+
|
.TP
\fIpathName \fBtag remove \fItag\fR ?\fIitems\fR?
Removes the specified \fItag\fR from each of the listed \fIitems\fR.
If \fIitems\fR is omitted, removes \fItag\fR from each item in the tree.
If \fItag\fR is not present for a particular item,
then the \fB\-tags\fR for that item are unchanged.
.RE
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview \fIargs\fR
Standard command for horizontal scrolling; see \fIwidget(n)\fR.
.TP
\fIpathName \fByview \fIargs\fR
.PP
The treeview widget also supports the following generic \fBttk::widget\fR
widget subcommands (see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR for details):
.DS
.ta 5.5c 11c
\fBxview\fR \fByview\fR
Standard command for vertical scrolling; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
.DE
.SH "ITEM OPTIONS"
.PP
The following item options may be specified for items
in the \fBinsert\fR and \fBitem\fR widget commands.
.OP \-text text Text
The textual label to display for the item.
.OP \-image image Image
|
︙ | | |
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
|
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
|
+
+
+
|
.\" ??? Maybe: .IP \-anchor
.\" ??? Maybe: .IP \-padding
.\" ??? Maybe: .IP \-text
.IP \fB\-image\fR
Specifies the item image, in case the item's \fB\-image\fR option is empty.
.\" .PP
.\" \fI(@@@ TODO: sort out order of precedence for options)\fR
.PP
Tag priority is decided by the creation order: tags created first receive
higher priority.
.SH "COLUMN IDENTIFIERS"
.PP
Column identifiers take any of the following forms:
.IP \(bu
A symbolic name from the list of \fB\-columns\fR.
.IP \(bu
An integer \fIn\fR, specifying the \fIn\fRth data column.
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/ttk_widget.n.
︙ | | |
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
|
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
|
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
.RE
.OP \-yscrollcommand yScrollCommand ScrollCommand
A command prefix, used to communicate with vertical scrollbars.
See the description of \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR above for details.
.SH "LABEL OPTIONS"
The following options are supported by labels, buttons,
and other button-like widgets:
.OP \-anchor anchor Anchor
Specifies how the information in the widget is positioned
relative to the inner margins. Legal values are
\fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBe\fR, \fBse\fR,
\fBs\fR, \fBsw\fR, \fBw\fR, \fBnw\fR, and \fBcenter\fR.
See also \fB\-justify\fR (for widgets supporting this option).
.OP \-compound compound Compound
Specifies how to display the image relative to the text,
in the case both \fB\-text\fR and \fB\-image\fR are present.
Valid values are:
.RS
.IP text
Display text only.
.IP image
Display image only.
.IP center
Display text centered on top of image.
.IP top
.IP bottom
.IP left
.IP right
Display image above, below, left of, or right of the text, respectively.
.IP none
The default; display the image if present, otherwise the text.
.RE
.OP \-font font Font
Font to use for the text displayed by the widget.
.OP \-foreground textColor TextColor
The widget's foreground color.
If unspecified, the theme default is used.
.OP \-image image Image
Specifies an image to display.
This is a list of 1 or more elements.
The first element is the default image name.
The rest of the list is a sequence of \fIstatespec / value\fR pairs
as per \fBstyle map\fR, specifying different images to use when
the widget is in a particular state or combination of states.
All images in the list should have the same size.
.OP \-justify justify Justify
If there are multiple lines of text, specifies how
the lines are laid out relative to one another.
One of \fBleft\fR, \fBcenter\fR, or \fBright\fR.
See also \fB\-anchor\fR (for widgets supporting this option).
.OP \-padding padding Padding
Specifies the internal padding for the widget.
The padding is a list of up to four length specifications
\fIleft top right bottom\fR.
If fewer than four elements are specified,
\fIbottom\fR defaults to \fItop\fR,
\fIright\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR, and
\fItop\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR.
In other words, a list of three numbers specify the left, vertical, and right padding;
a list of two numbers specify the horizontal and the vertical padding;
a single number specifies the same padding all the way around the widget.
.OP \-text text Text
Specifies a text string to be displayed inside the widget
(unless overridden by \fB\-textvariable\fR).
(unless overridden by \fB\-textvariable\fR for the widgets supporting this option).
.OP \-textvariable textVariable Variable
Specifies the name of a global variable whose value will be used
in place of the \fB\-text\fR resource.
.OP \-underline underline Underline
If set, specifies the integer index (0-based) of a character to underline
in the text string.
The underlined character is used for mnemonic activation.
.OP \-width width Width
If greater than zero, specifies how much space, in character widths,
to allocate for the text label.
If less than zero, specifies a minimum width.
If zero or unspecified, the natural width of the text label is used.
Note that some themes may specify a non-zero \fB\-width\fR
in the style.
.OP \-wraplength wrapLength WrapLength
Specifies the maximum line length. The value may have any of the forms
acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. If this option is less than or equal
to zero, then automatic wrapping is not performed; otherwise
the text is split into lines such that no line is longer
than the specified value.
.SH "ENTRY OPTIONS"
The following option is supported by entry, spinbox and combobox:
.OP \-placeholder placeHolder PlaceHolder
Specifies a help text string to display if no text is otherwise displayed,
that is when the widget is empty. The placeholder text is displayed using
the values of the \fB\-font\fR and \fB\-justify\fR options. The foreground
color of the placeholder text can be changed using the
\fB\-placeholderforeground\fR style option.
.SH "COMPATIBILITY OPTIONS"
This option is only available for themed widgets that have
.QW corresponding
traditional Tk widgets.
.OP \-state state State
May be set to \fBnormal\fR or \fBdisabled\fR
to control the \fBdisabled\fR state bit.
|
︙ | | |
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
|
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
|
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
set changes [\fIpathName \fRstate \fIspec\fR]
\fIpathName \fRstate $changes
.CE
will restore \fIpathName\fR to the original state.
If \fIstateSpec\fR is not specified,
returns a list of the currently-enabled state flags.
.RE
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview \fIargs\fR
This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the
content in the widget's window. It can take any of the following
forms:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview\fR
Returns a list containing two elements.
Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1; together they describe
the horizontal span that is visible in the window.
For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6,
20% of the widget's content is off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible
in the window, and 40% of the content is off-screen to the right.
These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR
option.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview\fR \fIindex\fR
Adjusts the view in the window so that the content given by \fIindex\fR
is displayed at the left edge of the window.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview moveto\fI fraction\fR
Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the
way through the content appears at the left edge of the window.
\fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR
This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to
\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR.
\fINumber\fR must be an integer.
\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBpages\fR or \fBunits\fR.
'\" or an abbreviation of one of these, but we don't document that.
If \fIwhat\fR is
\fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls.
If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left
become visible; if it is positive then characters farther to the right
become visible.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by
\fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display.
.RE
.TP
\fIpathName \fByview \fIargs\fR
This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the
content in the widget's window. It can take any of the following
forms:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fByview\fR
Returns a list containing two elements.
Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1; together they describe
the vertical span that is visible in the window.
For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6,
20% of the widget's content is off-screen to the top, the middle 40% is visible
in the window, and 40% of the content is off-screen to the bottom.
These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-yscrollcommand\fR
option.
.TP
\fIpathName \fByview\fR \fIindex\fR
Adjusts the view in the window so that the content given by \fIindex\fR
is displayed at the top edge of the window.
.TP
\fIpathName \fByview moveto\fI fraction\fR
Adjusts the view in the window so that the item \fIfraction\fR of the
way through the content appears at the top edge of the window.
\fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1.
.TP
\fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR
This command shifts the view in the window up or down according to
\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR.
\fINumber\fR must be an integer.
\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBpages\fR or \fBunits\fR.
'\" or an abbreviation of one of these, but we don't document that.
If \fIwhat\fR is
\fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls.
If \fInumber\fR is negative then items farther to the top
become visible; if it is positive then items farther to the bottom
become visible.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts up or down by
\fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display.
.RE
.SH "WIDGET STATES"
The widget state is a bitmap of independent state flags.
Widget state flags include:
.TP
\fBactive\fR
.
The mouse cursor is over the widget
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/winfo.n.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH winfo n 4.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
winfo \- Return window-related information
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/wish.1.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
|
-
+
|
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
'\"
.TH wish 1 8.0 Tk "Tk Applications"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
wish \- Simple windowing shell
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
︙ | | |
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
|
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
|
-
+
|
It will continue processing commands until all windows have been
deleted or until end-of-file is reached on standard input.
If there exists a file
.QW \fB.wishrc\fR
in the home directory of the user, \fBwish\fR evaluates the file as a
Tcl script just before reading the first command from standard input.
.PP
If arguments to \fBwish\fR do specify a \fIfileName\fR, then
If arguments to \fBwish\fR do specify a \fIfileName\fR, then
\fIfileName\fR is treated as the name of a script file.
\fBWish\fR will evaluate the script in \fIfileName\fR (which
presumably creates a user interface), then it will respond to events
until all windows have been deleted.
Commands will not be read from standard input.
There is no automatic evaluation of
.QW \fB.wishrc\fR
|
︙ | | |
Changes to doc/wm.n.
︙ | | |
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
|
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
|
-
+
|
.PP
On Macintosh, the first image called is loaded into an OSX-native icon
format, and becomes the application icon in dialogs, the Dock, and
other contexts. At the
script level the command will accept only the first image passed in the
parameters as support for multiple sizes/resolutions on macOS is outside Tk's
scope. Developers should use the largest icon they can support
(preferably 512 pixels) to ensure smooth rendering on the Mac.
(preferably 512 pixels) to ensure smooth rendering on the Mac.
.RE
.TP
\fBwm iconposition \fIwindow\fR ?\fIx y\fR?
.
If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are specified, they are passed to the window
manager as a hint about where to position the icon for \fIwindow\fR.
In this case an empty string is returned. If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are
|
︙ | | |
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
|
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
|
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
|
should display this string in \fIwindow\fR's title bar). In this
case the command returns an empty string. If \fIstring\fR is not
specified then the command returns the current title for the
\fIwindow\fR. The title for a window defaults to its name.
.TP
\fBwm transient \fIwindow\fR ?\fImaster\fR?
.
If \fImaster\fR is specified, then the window manager is informed
that \fIwindow\fR is a transient window (e.g. pull-down menu) working
on behalf of \fImaster\fR (where \fImaster\fR is the
path name for a top-level window). If \fImaster\fR
If \fImaster\fR is specified, then the window manager is informed that
\fIwindow\fR is a transient window (e.g. pull-down menu) working on
behalf of \fImaster\fR (where \fImaster\fR is the path name for a
top-level window). If \fImaster\fR is specified as an empty string
is specified as an empty string then \fIwindow\fR is marked as not
being a transient window any more. Otherwise the command
returns the path name of \fIwindow\fR's current master, or an
empty string if \fIwindow\fR is not currently a transient window.
A transient window will mirror state changes in the master and
inherit the state of the master when initially mapped. It is an
error to attempt to make a window a transient of itself.
The window manager may also decorate a transient window differently, removing
some features normally present (e.g., minimize and maximize buttons) though
this is entirely at the discretion of the window manager.
then \fIwindow\fR is marked as not being a transient window any more.
Otherwise the command returns the path name of \fIwindow\fR's current
master, or an empty string if \fIwindow\fR is not currently a
transient window. A transient window will mirror state changes in the
master and inherit the state of the master when initially mapped. The
directed graph with an edge from each transient to its master must be
acyclic. In particular, it is an error to attempt to make a window a
transient of itself. The window manager may also decorate a transient
window differently, removing some features normally present (e.g.,
minimize and maximize buttons) though this is entirely at the
discretion of the window manager.
.TP
\fBwm withdraw \fIwindow\fR
.
Arranges for \fIwindow\fR to be withdrawn from the screen. This
causes the window to be unmapped and forgotten about by the window
manager. If the window
has never been mapped, then this command
|
︙ | | |
Added generic/nanosvg.h.